Canon PowerShot G16 User guide

Canon PowerShot G16 User guide

Camera User Guide

ENGLISH

Make sure you read this guide, including the “Safety

Precautions” section (

=

8

), before using the camera.

Reading this guide will help you learn to use the camera properly.

Store this guide safely so that you can use it in the future.

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Click the buttons in the lower right to access other pages.

: Next page

: Previous page

: Page before you clicked a link

To jump to the beginning of a chapter, click the chapter title at right.

From chapter title pages, you can access topics by clicking their titles.

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

©CANON INC. 2013 CDD-E552-010 1

Package Contents

Before use, make sure the following items are included in the package.

If anything is missing, contact your camera retailer.

Camera Battery Pack

NB-10L

(with terminal cover)

Battery Charger

CB-2LC/CB-2LCE

Neck Strap Getting Started

• A memory card is not included (

= 2

).

Warranty Card

Compatible Memory Cards

The following memory cards (sold separately) can be used, regardless of capacity.

SD memory cards* 1

SDHC memory cards* 1 * 2

SDXC memory cards* 1 * 2

*1 Cards conforming to SD standards. However, not all memory cards have been verified to work with the camera.

*2 UHS-I memory cards are also supported.

Preliminary Notes and Legal

Information

Take and review some test shots initially to make sure the images were recorded correctly. Please note that Canon Inc., its subsidiaries and affiliates, and its distributors are not liable for any consequential damages arising from any malfunction of a camera or accessory, including memory cards, that result in the failure of an image to be recorded or to be recorded in a way that is machine readable.

Images recorded by the camera are intended for personal use. Refrain from unauthorized recording that infringes on copyright law, and note that even for personal use, photography may contravene copyright or other legal rights at some performances or exhibitions, or in some commercial settings.

The camera warranty is valid only in the area of purchase. In case of camera problems while abroad, return to the area of purchase before contacting a Canon Customer Support Help Desk.

Although the LCD monitor and viewfinder are produced under extremely high-precision manufacturing conditions and more than 99.99% of the pixels meet design specifications, in rare cases some pixels may be defective or may appear as red or black dots. This does not indicate camera damage or affect recorded images.

The LCD monitor may be covered with a thin plastic film for protection against scratches during shipment. If covered, remove the film before using the camera.

When the camera is used over an extended period, it may become warm.

This does not indicate damage.

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

2

Part Names and Conventions in This

Guide

Front dial

Lamp

Lens

Zoom lever

Shooting: < i (telephoto)> /

< j (wide angle)>

Playback: < k (magnify)> /

< g (index)>

Strap mount

Shutter button

Power button/lamp

Mode dial

Hot shoe

< (Flash up)> switch

Flash

Speaker

Ring release button

DC coupler cable port

Memory card/battery cover

Tripod socket

Shooting modes and on-screen icons and text are indicated in brackets.

: Important information you should know

: Notes and tips for expert camera use

= xx : Pages with related information (in this example, “xx” represents a page number)

Instructions in this guide apply to the camera under default settings.

For convenience, all supported memory cards are simply referred to as the “memory card”.

The tabs shown above titles indicate whether the function is used for still images, movies, or both.

Still Images

: Indicates that the function is used when shooting or viewing still images.

Movies

: Indicates that the function is used when shooting or viewing movies.

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

3

Wi-Fi antenna area

< (Shortcut)> button

<

+

(AE lock/FE lock)> /

< (Filtering image display)> button

< (ISO speed)> /

< a

(Single-image erase)> button

Screen (LCD monitor)

Diopter adjustment dial

Viewfinder

Microphone

Indicator

Exposure compensation dial

<

1

(Playback)> button

Movie button

Remote terminal

AV OUT (Audio/video output) /

DIGITAL terminal

HDMI

TM

terminal

< n > button

< (AF frame selector)> /

< (Wi-Fi)> button

< f (Manual focus)> / Up button

< e (Macro)> / Left button

Control dial

FUNC./SET button

< h (Flash)> / Right button

< l (Display)> / Down button z z choose setting items, switch images, and perform other operations. Most of these operations are also possible with the

< o

>< p

>< q

>< r

> buttons.

In this guide, icons are used to represent the corresponding camera buttons and dials on which they appear or which they resemble.

The following camera buttons and controls are represented by icons.

< 7 > Control dial on back

< z > Front dial on front

< o > Up button on back

< q > Left button on back

< r > Right button on back

< p > Down button on back

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

4

Table of Contents

Package Contents .........................

2

Compatible Memory Cards ............

2

Preliminary Notes and Legal

Information .....................................

2

Part Names and Conventions in This Guide ..................................

3

Table of Contents ...........................

5

Common Camera Operations ........

7

Safety Precautions .........................

8

Basic Guide ....................

11

Initial Preparations .......................

12

Trying the Camera Out ................

16

Advanced Guide .............

20

1

Camera Basics .....................

20

On/Off ..........................................

21

Shutter Button ..............................

22

Optical Viewfinder ........................

22

Shooting Modes ...........................

23

Shooting Display Options ............

23

Using the FUNC. Menu ................

24

Using Menus ................................

25

On-Screen Keyboard ...................

26

Indicator Display ..........................

27

Clock ............................................

27

2

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode ................

28

Shooting with Camera-Determined

Settings ........................................

29

Common, Convenient Features ...

35

Using Face ID ..............................

39

Image Customization Features ....

44

Helpful Shooting Features ...........

47

Customizing Camera Operation ..

48

3

Other Shooting Modes ........

51

Specific Scenes ...........................

52

Image Effects (Creative Filters) ...

54

Special Modes for Other

Purposes ......................................

60

Shooting Various Movies .............

65

4

P Mode ..................................

67

Shooting in Program AE

([P] Mode) ....................................

68

Image Brightness (Exposure) ......

68

Color and Continuous Shooting ...

74

Shooting Range and Focusing ....

77

Flash ............................................

85

Shooting RAW Images .................

88

Other Settings ..............................

89

5

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2

Mode .....................................

91

Specific Shutter Speeds

([Tv] Mode) ...................................

92

Specific Aperture Values

([Av] Mode) ..................................

93

Specific Shutter Speeds and

Aperture Values ([M] Mode) .........

93

Customization for Shooting

Styles ...........................................

95

Customizing the FUNC. Menu

(FUNC. Menu Layout) ..................

98

6

Playback Mode ..................

101

Viewing ......................................

102

Browsing and Filtering Images ..

105

Editing Face ID Information .......

108

Image Viewing Options ..............

109

Protecting Images ......................

111

Erasing Images ..........................

114

Rotating Images .........................

116

Tagging Images as Favorites .....

117

Convenient Control

Using the < > Button ..............

118

Editing Still Images ....................

118

Editing Movies ............................

122

7

Wi-Fi Functions .................

124

What You Can Do with Wi-Fi .....

125

Preparing to Share Images via

Wi-Fi ...........................................

126

Registering Web Services ..........

127

Installing CameraWindow on a

Smartphone ...............................

130

Preparing to Register a

Computer ...................................

131

Accessing the Wi-Fi Menu .........

133

Connecting via an Access

Point ...........................................

134

Connecting without an

Access Point ..............................

139

Connecting to Another

Camera ......................................

141

Sending Images .........................

142

Saving Images to a Computer ...

144

Sending Images Automatically

(Image Sync) ..............................

145

Geotagging Images on the

Camera ......................................

146

Editing or Erasing Wi-Fi

Settings ......................................

147

8

Setting Menu ......................

149

Adjusting Basic Camera

Functions ...................................

150

9

Accessories .......................

158

System Map ...............................

159

Optional Accessories .................

160

Using Optional Accessories .......

163

Using the Software ....................

173

Printing Images ..........................

176

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

5

10

Appendix ............................

184

Troubleshooting .........................

185

On-Screen Messages ................

188

On-Screen Information ..............

191

Functions and Menu Tables .......

193

Handling Precautions .................

203

Specifications .............................

203

Index ..........................................

207

Wi-Fi (Wireless LAN)

Precautions ................................

210

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

6

Common Camera Operations

4

Shoot

z z

(Auto Mode, Hybrid Auto Mode) .....................................................

29

, 31

Shooting people well

I

Portraits

(

= 52 )

P

Against Snow

( = 52 )

Matching specific scenes

Night Scenes

(

= 52 )

S

Under Water

(

= 52 )

t

Fireworks

(

= 53 )

Starry Skies

( = 62

)

Applying special effects

Vivid Colors

(

= 54

)

Fish-Eye Effect

(

=

56

)

Background Defocus

(

= 58

)

Poster Effect

( = 55

)

Miniature Effect

(

=

57

)

Soft Focus

(

= 59 )

“Aged” Photos

( = 56

)

Toy Camera Effect

(

=

58

)

Monochrome

( = 59

) z z

29

, 52 ,

82 ,

84

z z .................................................

29 ,

86

z z

36 ,

61

z z

38

z z

39

,

105

z z

31

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

7

1

View

z z

102

z z

110

z z

163

z z

174

z z .........................................................

105

z z

114

E

Shoot/View Movies

z z

29

, 65

z z

102

z z

66

c

Print

z z

176

Save

z z

174

Use Wi-Fi Functions

z z

126

z z

127

z z

145

Safety Precautions

Before using the product, please ensure that you read the safety precautions described below. Always ensure that the product is used correctly.

The safety precautions noted on the following pages are intended to prevent injuries to yourself and other persons, or damage to the equipment.

Be sure to also check the guides included with any separately sold accessories you use.

Warning

Denotes the possibility of serious injury or death.

• Do not trigger the flash in close proximity to people’s eyes.

Exposure to the intense light produced by the flash could damage eyesight.

In particular, remain at least 1 meter (39 inches) away from infants when using the flash.

• Store this equipment out of the reach of children and infants.

Strap: Putting the strap around a child’s neck could result in asphyxiation.

Date/time battery (if removable): Dangerous if swallowed. If this occurs, contact a doctor immediately.

• Use only recommended power sources.

• Do not attempt to disassemble, alter or apply heat to the product.

• Avoid dropping or subjecting the product to severe impacts.

• To avoid the risk of injury, do not touch the interior of the product if it has been dropped or otherwise damaged.

• Stop using the product immediately if it emits smoke, a strange smell, or otherwise behaves abnormally.

• Do not use organic solvents such as alcohol, benzine, or thinner to clean the product.

• Do not let the product come into contact with water (e.g. sea water) or other liquids.

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

8

• Do not allow liquids or foreign objects to enter the camera.

This could result in electrical shock or fire.

If liquids or foreign objects come into contact with the camera interior, immediately turn the camera off and remove the battery pack/batteries.

If the battery charger (for cameras that use one) becomes wet, unplug it from the outlet and consult your camera retailer or a Canon Customer

Support Help Desk.

• Do not look through the viewfinder (if your model has one) at bright light sources, such as the sun on a clear day.

This could damage your eyesight.

• Use only the recommended battery pack/batteries.

• Do not place the battery pack/batteries near or in direct flame.

• If your camera uses a battery charger, note the following precautions.

- Unplug the power cord periodically, and using a dry cloth, wipe away any dust and dirt that has collected on the plug, the exterior of the power outlet, and the surrounding area.

- Do not handle the power cord with wet hands.

- Do not use the equipment in a manner that exceeds the rated capacity of the electrical outlet or wiring accessories. Do not use if the power cord or plug are damaged, or not fully plugged into the outlet.

- Do not allow dirt or metal objects (such as pins or keys) to contact the terminals or plug.

The battery pack/batteries may explode or leak, resulting in electrical shock or fire. This could cause injury and damage the surroundings. In the event that a battery pack leaks and the battery electrolyte contacts eyes, mouth, skin or clothing, immediately flush with water.

• Turn the camera off in places where camera use is prohibited.

The electromagnetic waves emitted by the camera may interfere with the operation of electronic instruments and other devices. Exercise adequate caution when using the camera in places where use of electronic devices is restricted, such as inside airplanes and medical facilities.

Caution

Denotes the possibility of injury.

• When holding the camera by the strap, be careful not to bang it, subject it to strong impacts or shocks, or let it get caught on other objects.

• Be careful not to bump or push strongly on the lens.

This could lead to injury or damage the camera.

• Be careful not to subject the screen to strong impacts.

If the screen cracks, injury may result from the broken fragments.

• When using the flash, be careful not to cover it with your fingers or clothing.

This could result in burns or damage to the flash.

• Avoid using, placing or storing the product in the following places:

- Places subject to direct sunlight

- Places subject to temperatures above 40 °C (104 °F)

- Humid or dusty areas

These could cause leakage, overheating or an explosion of the battery pack/batteries, resulting in electrical shock, fire, burns or other injuries.

High temperatures may deform the product.

• The slideshow transition effects may cause discomfort when viewed for prolonged periods.

• When using optional lenses, lens filters, or filter adapters (if applicable), be sure to attach these accessories firmly.

If the lens becomes loose and falls off, it may crack, and the shards of glass may lead to cuts.

• On cameras that raise and lower the flash automatically, make sure your finger is out of the way when the flash is lowered, to avoid pinching it.

This could result in injury.

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

9

Caution

Denotes the possibility of damage to the equipment.

• Do not aim the camera at bright light sources (such as the sun on a clear day).

Doing so may damage the image sensor.

• When using the camera on a beach or at a windy location, be careful not to allow dust or sand to enter the camera.

• On cameras that raise and lower the flash automatically, do not push the flash down or pry it open.

This may cause the product to malfunction.

• In regular use, small amounts of smoke may be emitted from the flash.

This is due to the high intensity of the flash burning dust and foreign materials stuck to the front of the unit. Please use a cotton swab to remove dirt, dust or other foreign matter from the flash to prevent heat build-up and damage to the unit.

• Remove and store the battery pack/batteries when you are not using the camera.

If the battery pack or batteries are left inside the camera, damage caused by leakage may occur.

• Before you discard the battery pack/batteries, cover the terminals with tape or other insulators.

Contacting other metal materials may lead to fire or explosions.

• If your camera is used with a battery charger, keep the charger unplugged when not in use. When charging the battery pack, do not leave it covered with a cloth or put other objects on it.

Leaving the unit plugged in for a long period of time may cause it to overheat and distort, resulting in fire.

• Do not leave the battery pack near pets.

Pets biting the battery pack could cause leakage, overheating or explosion, resulting in fire or damage.

• If your camera uses multiple batteries, do not use batteries that have different levels of charge together, do not use old and new batteries together, and do not insert the batteries with the + and – terminals reversed.

This may cause the product to malfunction.

• Do not sit down with the camera in your pocket.

Doing so may cause malfunctions or damage the screen.

• When putting the camera in your bag, ensure that hard objects do not come into contact with the screen. Also close the screen (so that it faces the camera body), if your camera has a screen that closes.

• Do not attach any hard objects to the camera.

Doing so may cause malfunctions or damage the screen.

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

10

Basic Guide

Basic information and instructions, from initial preparations to shooting and playback

Initial Preparations ...........................................

12

Attaching the Strap ................................................

12

Holding the Camera ..............................................

12

Charging the Battery Pack ....................................

12

Inserting the Battery Pack and Memory Card .......

13

Setting the Date and Time .....................................

14

Display Language .................................................

16

Trying the Camera Out .....................................

16

Shooting (Smart Auto) ...........................................

16

Viewing ..................................................................

18

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

11

Initial Preparations

Prepare for shooting as follows.

Attaching the Strap

z z as shown.

z z the strap the same way.

Holding the Camera

z z z z your body and hold the camera securely to prevent it from moving. If you have raised the flash, do not rest your fingers on it.

Charging the Battery Pack

Before use, charge the battery pack with the included charger. Be sure to charge the battery pack initially, because the camera is not sold with the battery pack charged.

1

Insert the battery pack.

z z the

marks on the battery and charger, and insert the battery by pushing it in ( ) and down ( ).

CB-2LC

CB-2LCE

2

Charge the battery pack.

z z : Flip out the plug ( ) and plug the charger into a power outlet ( ).

z z : Plug the power cord into the charger, then plug the other end into a power outlet.

z z charging begins.

z z green.

3

Remove the battery pack.

z z remove the battery pack by pushing it in

( ) and up ( ).

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

12

To protect the battery pack and keep it in optimal condition, do not charge it continuously for more than 24 hours.

For battery chargers that use a power cord, do not attach the charger or cord to other objects. Doing so could result in malfunction or damage to the product.

For details on charging time and the number of shots and recording time

possible with a fully charged battery pack, see “Number of Shots/Recording

Time, Playback Time” ( = 204 ).

Charged battery packs gradually lose their charge, even when they are not used. Charge the battery pack on (or immediately before) the day of use. As a visual reminder of the charging status, attach the battery cover with  visible on a charged battery pack and concealed on an uncharged one.

The charger can be used in areas with 100 – 240 V AC power (50/60 Hz). For power outlets in a different format, use a commercially available adapter for the plug. Never use an electrical transformer designed for traveling, which may damage the battery pack.

Inserting the Battery Pack and Memory Card

Insert the included battery pack and a memory card (sold separately).

Note that before using a new memory card (or a memory card formatted in another device), you should format the memory card with this camera

(

= 153

).

1

Check the card’s write-protect

tab.

z z cards with a write-protect tab when the tab is in the locked (downward) position.

Slide the tab up until it clicks into the unlocked position.

Terminals Battery

Lock

Label

2

Open the cover.

z z

3

Insert the battery pack.

z z direction of the arrow, insert the battery pack as shown and push it in until it clicks into the locked position.

z z wrong way, it cannot be locked into the correct position. Always confirm that the battery pack is facing the right way and locks when inserted.

4

Insert the memory card.

z z until it clicks into the locked position.

z z right way when you insert it. Inserting memory cards facing the wrong way may damage the camera.

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

13

5

Close the cover.

z z you slide it, until it clicks into the closed position ( ).

For guidelines on how many shots or hours of recording can be saved on one

memory card, see “Number of 4:3 Shots per Memory Card” ( = 204 ).

Removing the Battery Pack and Memory Card

Remove the battery pack.

z z lock in the direction of the arrow.

z z

Remove the memory card.

z z and then slowly release it.

z z

Setting the Date and Time

Set the current date and time correctly as follows if the [Date/Time] screen is displayed when you turn the camera on. Information you specify this way is recorded in image properties when you shoot, and it is used when you manage images by shooting date or print images showing the date.

You can also add a date stamp to shots, if you wish (

=

38

).

1

Turn the camera on.

z z z z

2

Set the date and time.

z z q >< r > buttons to choose an option.

z z o >< p > buttons or turn the

< 7 > dial to specify the date and time.

z z m > button.

3

Set the home time zone.

z z q >< r > buttons or turn the

< 7 > dial to choose your home time zone.

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

14

4

Finish the setup process.

z z m

> button when finished.

After a confirmation message, the setting screen is no longer displayed.

z z button.

Unless you set the date, time, and home time zone, the [Date/Time] screen will be displayed each time you turn the camera on. Specify the correct information.

To set daylight saving time (1 hour ahead), choose [ ] in step 2 and then choose [ ] by pressing the < o >< p > buttons or turning the < 7 > dial.

Changing the Date and Time

Adjust the date and time as follows.

1

Access the camera menu.

z z n > button.

2

Choose [Date/Time].

z z

3

] tab.

z z o >< p > buttons or turn the

< 7 > dial to choose [Date/Time], and then press the < m

> button.

3

Change the date and time.

z z

Time” ( = 14

) to adjust the settings.

z z n > button to close the menu.

Date/time settings can be retained for about 3 weeks by the camera’s built-in date/time battery (backup battery) after the battery pack is removed.

The date/time battery will be charged in about 4 hours once you insert a charged battery pack or connect the camera to an AC adapter kit (sold

separately, = 160

), even if the camera is left off.

Once the date/time battery is depleted, the [Date/Time] screen will be displayed when you turn the camera on. Set the correct date and time as

described in “Setting the Date and Time” ( = 14 ).

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

15

Display Language

Change the display language as needed.

1

Enter Playback mode.

z z 1 > button.

2

Access the setting screen.

z z m > button, and then immediately press the < n > button.

3

Set the display language.

z z o >< p >< q >< r > buttons or turn the < 7 > dial to choose a language, and then press the < m > button.

z z the setting screen is no longer displayed.

Trying the Camera Out

Still Images Movies

Follow these instructions to turn the camera on, shoot still images or movies, and then view them.

Shooting (Smart Auto)

For fully automatic selection of the optimal settings for specific scenes, simply let the camera determine the subject and shooting conditions.

1

Turn the camera on.

z z z z

2

Enter [ ] mode.

z z ].

z z camera will make a slight clicking noise as it determines the scene.

z z stabilization mode are displayed in the upper left of the screen.

z z subjects indicate that they are in focus.

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

The current time is displayed if you wait too long in step 2 after pressing the

< m > button before you press the < n > button. In this case, press the

< m > button to dismiss the time display and repeat step 2.

You can also change the display language by pressing the < n > button and choosing [Language ] on the [

3

] tab.

16

3

Compose the shot.

z z the zoom lever toward < i > (telephoto), and to zoom away from the subject, move it toward < j > (wide angle).

4

Shoot.

Shooting Still Images

Focus.

z z down. The camera beeps twice after focusing, and AF frames are displayed to indicate image areas in focus.

z z move the < > switch to raise the flash.

It will fire when shooting. If you prefer not to use the flash, push it down with your finger, into the camera.

Elapsed Time

Shoot.

z z z down.

z is played, and in low-light conditions when you have raised the flash, it fires automatically.

z z sound ends.

z z revert to the shooting screen.

Shooting Movies

Start shooting.

z z beeps once as recording begins, and

[ Rec] is displayed with the elapsed time.

z z bottom edges of the screen, and the subject is slightly enlarged. These areas will not be recorded.

z z z faces indicate that they are in focus.

z off the movie button.

Finish shooting.

z z shooting. The camera beeps twice as recording stops.

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

17

You can make a short movie of the day (digest movie) just by shooting still images. When the mode dial is set to [ ], the camera automatically records a movie clip of the scene immediately before each shot (Hybrid Auto Mode

( = 31

)).

Viewing

After shooting images or movies, you can view them on the screen as follows.

1

Enter Playback mode.

z z 1 > button.

z z

2

Browse through your images.

z z the < q > button or turn the < 7 > dial counterclockwise. To view the next image, press the < r > button or turn the

< 7 > dial clockwise.

z z q >< r > buttons to browse through images quickly.

Volume z z

< 7 > dial rapidly. In this mode, turn the

<

7

> dial to browse through images.

z z the < m

> button.

z z play movies, go to step 3.

] icon. To

3

Play movies.

z z m > button to access the movie control panel, choose [ ] (either press the < q

>< r

> buttons or turn the

< 7 > dial), and then press the < m > button again.

z z is finished, [ ] is displayed.

z z o >< p > buttons.

To switch to Shooting mode from Playback mode, press the shutter button halfway.

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

18

Erasing the Images

You can choose and erase unneeded images one by one. Be careful when erasing images, because they cannot be recovered.

1

Choose an image to erase.

z z q

>< r

> buttons or turn the

< 7 > dial to choose an image.

2

Erase the image.

z z a > button.

z z

< q >< r > buttons or turn the < 7 > dial to choose [Erase], and then press the < m > button.

z z z z q >< r > buttons or turn the < 7 > dial to choose

[Cancel], and then press the < m > button.

You can also erase all images at once (

= 114

).

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

19

Advanced Guide

1

Camera Basics

Practical guide that introduces other camera basics and describes shooting and playback options

On/Off ................................................................

21

Power-Saving Features (Auto Power Down) ........

21

Shutter Button ..................................................

22

Optical Viewfinder ............................................

22

Shooting Modes ...............................................

23

Shooting Display Options ...............................

23

Using the FUNC. Menu ....................................

24

Using Menus .....................................................

25

On-Screen Keyboard .......................................

26

Indicator Display ..............................................

27

Clock .................................................................

27

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

20

On/Off

Shooting Mode

z z camera on and prepare for shooting.

z z button again.

Playback Mode

z z 1 > button to turn the camera z on and view your shots.

To turn the camera off, press the < button again.

1 >

To switch to Playback mode from Shooting mode, press the < 1 > button.

To switch to Shooting mode from Playback mode, press the shutter button

halfway (

=

22 ).

The lens will be retracted after about one minute once the camera is in

Playback mode. You can turn the camera off when the lens is retracted by pressing the < 1 > button.

Power-Saving Features (Auto Power Down)

As a way to conserve battery power, the camera automatically deactivates the screen (Display Off) and then turns itself off after a specific period of inactivity.

Power Saving in Shooting Mode

The screen is automatically deactivated after about one minute of inactivity.

In about two more minutes, the lens is retracted and the camera turns itself off. To activate the screen and prepare for shooting when the screen is off

but the lens is still out, press the shutter button halfway ( = 22 ).

Power Saving in Playback Mode

The camera turns itself off automatically after about five minutes of inactivity.

You can deactivate Auto Power Down and adjust the timing of Display Off, if

you prefer (

=

152 ).

Power saving is not active while the camera is connected to other devices via

Wi-Fi ( = 124 ), or when connected to a computer (

= 174

).

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

21

Shutter Button

To ensure your shots are in focus, always begin by holding the shutter button halfway down, and once the subject is in focus, press the button all the way down to shoot.

In this manual, shutter button operations are described as pressing the button

halfway

or

all the way down

.

1

Press halfway. (Press lightly to focus.)

z z camera beeps twice, and AF frames are displayed around image areas in focus.

2

Press all the way down. (From the halfway position, press fully to shoot.)

z z is played.

z z sound ends.

Images may be out of focus if you shoot without initially pressing the shutter button halfway.

Length of shutter sound playback varies depending on the time required for the shot. It may take longer in some shooting scenes, and images will be blurry if you move the camera (or the subject moves) before the shutter sound ends.

Optical Viewfinder

To conserve battery power when shooting, you can use the optical viewfinder instead of the screen. Shoot the same way as when using the screen.

1

Deactivate the screen.

z z p > button several times to turn the screen off (

= 23

).

2

Adjust the diopter.

z z viewfinder, turn the dial one way or the other so that images look sharp.

The area visible in the optical viewfinder may differ slightly from the image area in your shots.

At aspect ratios other than 4:3, the area visible in the optical viewfinder differs from the image area in your shots. Check the settings before shooting.

The lens may be partially visible through the optical viewfinder at some zoom positions.

Although the camera automatically focuses on subjects, face detection and focusing is not possible.

Continuous shooting is not supported in [ will not determine the shooting scene.

] mode, because the camera

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

22

Shooting Modes

Use the mode dial to access each shooting mode.

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Fully automatic shooting, with camera-determined settings

(

= 16 ,

29 ,

31

).

Special Scene Mode

Shoot with optimal settings for

specific scenes ( = 52

).

Creative Filters Mode

Add a variety of effects to images

when shooting ( = 54

).

P, Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Modes

Take a variety of shots using your preferred settings

(

= 67

,

91 ).

Movie Mode

For shooting movies

( = 65

).

You can also shoot movies when the mode dial is not set to Movie mode, simply by pressing the movie button.

Shooting Display Options

Press the < p > button to view other information on the screen, or to hide

the information. For details on the information displayed, see “On-Screen

Information” ( = 191 ).

Display 1 Display 2 Display Off

Even if the screen is off, it will turn on when you start shooting a movie.

Screen brightness is automatically increased by the night display function when you are shooting under low light, making it easier to check how shots are composed. However, on-screen image brightness may not match the brightness of your shots. Note that any on-screen image distortion or jerky subject motion will not affect recorded images.

For playback display options, see “Switching Display Modes” ( = 103 ).

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

23

Using the FUNC. Menu

Configure commonly used shooting functions through the FUNC. menu as follows.

Note that menu items and options vary depending on the shooting mode

(

=

195

197 ).

1

Access the FUNC. menu.

z z m > button.

2

Choose a menu item.

z z o >< p > buttons to choose a menu item.

z z of the screen.

Options

Menu Items

3

Choose an option.

z z q >< r > buttons or turn the

< 7 > dial to choose an option.

z z ] icon can be configured by pressing the < n > button.

z z configured by pressing the < > button.

z z ] icon can be configured by pressing the < > button.

4

Finish the setup process.

z z m

> button.

z z

< m

> button in step 1 is displayed again, showing the option you configured.

To undo any accidental setting changes, you can restore the camera’s default

settings ( = 157

).

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

24

Using Menus

Configure a variety of camera functions through other menus as follows.

Menu items are grouped by purpose on tabs, such as shooting [

4

], playback [ 1 ], and so on. Note that available menu items vary depending on the selected shooting or playback mode (

=

198

202 ).

1

Access the menu.

z z n > button.

2

Choose a tab.

z z z z o >< p > buttons or turned the < 7 > dial to choose a tab initially, you can switch between tabs by pressing the < q

>< r

> buttons.

3

Choose a menu item.

z z o

>< p

> buttons or turn the z

< 7 > dial to choose a menu item.

For menu items with options not shown, first press the < m > or < r > button to switch screens, and then either press the

< o >< p > buttons or turn the < 7 > dial to select the menu item.

z z the < n

> button.

4

Choose an option.

z z q >< r > buttons to choose an option.

5

Finish the setup process.

z z n > button to return to the screen displayed before you pressed the

< n > button in step 1.

To undo any accidental setting changes, you can restore the camera’s default

settings ( = 157

).

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

25

On-Screen Keyboard

Use the on-screen keyboard to enter information for Face ID (

= 40

),

Wi-Fi connections (

=

133 ), and so on. Note that the length and type of

information you can enter varies depending on the function you are using.

Number of Available Characters

Entering Characters

z z o >< p >< q >< r > buttons or turn the < 7 > dial to choose a character, and then press the < m > button to enter it.

z z varies depending on the function you are using.

Moving the Cursor

z z m > button. Alternatively, turn the < 7 > dial.

Entering Line Breaks

z z ] and press the < m

> button.

Switching Input Modes

z z

[ ] and press the < m > button.

z z lowercase letters, choose [ ] and press the < m > button.

z z the function you are using.

Deleting Characters

z z choose [ ] and press the < m

> button.

Alternatively, press the < a > button.

z z a

> button will delete five characters at a time.

Confirming Input and Returning to

the Previous Screen

z z n > button.

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

26

Indicator Display

The indicator of the camera (

= 3

,

4 ) lights up or blinks depending

on the camera status.

Indicator

Power Lamp

Indicator

Color

Green

Green

Orange

Indicator

Status

On

On

Camera Status

Camera on

Ready to shoot (when the flash is deactivated)

Blinking

On

Recording/reading/transmitting images, shooting

long exposures ( = 92

,

93

), distance

warning ( = 185 ), cannot focus (when the flash is deactivated) ( = 185 ), or connecting/

transmitting via Wi-Fi

Ready to shoot (when the flash is activated)

Blinking Distance warning (

=

185

), or cannot focus

(when the flash is activated) (

=

185

)

When the indicator blinks green, never turn the camera off, open the memory card/battery cover, or shake or jolt the camera, which may corrupt images or damage the camera or memory card.

Clock

You can check the current time.

z z m > button.

z z z z using the clock function, it will switch to vertical display. Press the < q >< r > buttons or turn the < 7 > dial to change the display color.

z z m > button again to cancel the clock display.

When the camera is off, press and hold the < m

> button, then press the power button to display the clock.

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

27

2

Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode

Convenient mode for easy shots with greater control over shooting

Shooting with Camera-Determined

Settings ............................................................

29

Shooting (Smart Auto) ...........................................

29

Shooting in Hybrid Auto Mode ...............................

31

Scene Icons ..........................................................

33

Image Stabilization Icons ......................................

34

On-Screen Frames ................................................

35

Common, Convenient Features ......................

35

Zooming In Closer on Subjects (Digital Zoom) .....

35

Using the Self-Timer..............................................

36

Adding a Date Stamp ............................................

38

Choosing Subjects to Focus On (Tracking AF) .....

38

Using Face ID ...................................................

39

Registering Face ID Information ...........................

39

Shooting ................................................................

41

Checking and Editing Registered Information .......

42

Image Customization Features .......................

44

Changing the Aspect Ratio ....................................

44

Changing Image Resolution (Size) .......................

45

Red-Eye Correction ...............................................

45

Correcting Greenish Image Areas from Mercury

Lamps ...................................................................

46

Changing Movie Image Quality .............................

46

Helpful Shooting Features ..............................

47

Using the Dual Axis Electronic Level .....................

47

Magnifying the Area in Focus ................................

47

Checking for Closed Eyes .....................................

48

Customizing Camera Operation .....................

48

Deactivating the AF-Assist Beam ..........................

48

Deactivating the Red-Eye Reduction Lamp ..........

49

Changing the Image Display Style after Shots ......

49

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

28

Shooting with Camera-Determined

Settings

For fully automatic selection of the optimal settings for specific scenes, simply let the camera determine the subject and shooting conditions.

Movies Still Images

Shooting (Smart Auto)

1

Turn the camera on.

z z z z

2

Enter [ ] mode.

z z ].

z z camera will make a slight clicking noise as it determines the scene.

z z stabilization mode are displayed in the upper left of the screen (

= 33

,

34

).

z z subjects indicate that they are in focus.

Zoom Bar

Focus Range (approx.)

3

Compose the shot.

z z the zoom lever toward < i > (telephoto), and to zoom away from the subject, move it toward < j > (wide angle). (A zoom bar showing the zoom position is displayed.)

4

Shoot.

Shooting Still Images

Focus.

z z camera beeps twice after focusing, and

AF frames are displayed to indicate image areas in focus.

z z multiple areas are in focus.

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

z z move the < > switch to raise the flash.

It will fire when shooting. If you prefer not to use the flash, push it down with your finger, into the camera.

29

Elapsed Time

Shoot.

z z z down.

z is played, and in low-light conditions when you have raised the flash, it fires automatically.

z z sound ends.

z z revert to the shooting screen.

Shooting Movies

Start shooting.

z z beeps once as recording begins, and

[ Rec] is displayed with the elapsed time.

z z bottom edges of the screen, and the subject is slightly enlarged. These areas will not be recorded.

z z faces indicate that they are in focus.

z z off the movie button.

Resize the subject and recompose the shot as needed.

z z

operations in step 3 ( = 29 ).

However, note that the sound of camera operations will be recorded.

z z focus, brightness, and colors will be automatically adjusted.

Finish shooting.

z z shooting. The camera beeps twice as recording stops.

z z the memory card becomes full.

The flash firing during shots indicates that the camera has automatically attempted to ensure optimal colors in the main subject and background (Multiarea White Balance).

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

30

Still Images

Shooting in Hybrid Auto Mode

Movies

You can make a short movie of the day just by shooting still images. The camera records 2 – 4-second clips of scenes before each shot, which are later combined in a digest movie.

1

Enter [ ] mode.

z z

(

= 29

) and choose [ ].

2

Compose the shot.

z z

Auto)” ( = 29 ) to compose the shot and

focus.

z z aim the camera at subjects about four seconds before shooting still images.

3

Shoot.

z z

(

= 29

) to shoot a still image.

z z and movie clip. The clip, which ends with the still image and a shutter sound, forms a single chapter in the digest movie.

Battery life is shorter in this mode than in [ digest movies are recorded for each shot.

] mode, because

A digest movie may not be recorded if you shoot a still image immediately after turning the camera on, choosing [ ] mode, or operating the camera in other ways.

Camera operating sounds will be recorded in digest movies.

Digest movie quality is [ ] and cannot be changed.

Some camera sounds will be muted. Sounds are not played when you press the shutter button halfway or trigger the self-timer (

= 150

).

Digest movies are saved as separate movie files in the following cases even if they were recorded on the same day in [ ] mode.

- The digest movie file size reaches approximately 4 GB, or the total recording time reaches approximately 13 minutes and 20 seconds.

-

The digest movie is protected ( = 111

).

-

Daylight saving time ( = 15 ) or time zone (

= 151 ) settings are changed.

-

A new folder is created ( = 155 ).

Recorded shutter sounds cannot be modified or erased.

If you prefer to record digest movies without still images, adjust the setting in advance. Press the < n > button, and on the [ 4 ] tab, set [Digest Type] to

[No Stills] (

= 25 ).

Individual chapters can be edited (

= 123

).

Digest Movie Playback

Display a still image shot in [ ] mode to play a digest movie, or specify the date of the digest movie to play (

=

104 ).

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

31

Still Images/Movies

To activate the screen when the camera is on but the screen is blank in [ ] mode, press the < p

> button.

If the camera is turned on while the < p > button is held down, the camera will no longer sound. To activate sounds again, press the

< n > button and choose [Mute] on the [ 3 ] tab, and then press the < q

>< r

> buttons to choose [Off].

Still Images

A blinking [ ] icon warns that images are more likely to be blurred by camera shake. In this case, mount the camera on a tripod or take other measures to keep it still.

If your shots are dark despite the flash firing, move closer to the

subject. For details on the flash range, see “Flash Range” ( = 205 ).

The subject may be too close if the camera only beeps once when you press the shutter button halfway. For details on the focusing

range (shooting range), see “Shooting Range” (

=

205 ).

To reduce red-eye and to assist in focusing, the lamp may be activated when shooting in low-light conditions.

A blinking [ h ] icon displayed when you attempt to shoot indicates that shooting is not possible until the flash has finished recharging.

Shooting can resume as soon as the flash is ready, so either press the shutter button all the way down and wait, or release it and press it again.

The shutter sound will not be played when the Sleeping and Babies

(Sleeping) icons (

= 33

) are displayed.

Although you can shoot again before the shooting screen is displayed, your previous shot may determine the focus, brightness, and colors used.

You can change how long images are displayed after shots ( = 49

).

Movies

Microphone

Keep your fingers away from the microphone while shooting movies.

Blocking the microphone may prevent audio from being recorded or may cause the recording to sound muffled.

Avoid touching camera controls other than the movie button when shooting movies, because sounds made by the camera will be recorded.

Once movie recording begins, a smaller image display area is shown, with the subject enlarged, as a measure when correcting distortion such as rotational camera shake. To shoot subjects at the same size shown before shooting, adjust the image stabilization

setting ( = 89

).

Audio is recorded in stereo.

Distorted audio caused by recording when the wind is strong can be reduced.

However, the recording may sound unnatural when this option is used when there is no wind. When the wind is not strong, press the < n > button, choose [Wind Filter] on the [ 4 ] tab, and then choose [Off] (

= 25 ).

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

32

Still Images Movies

Scene Icons

In [ ] and [ ] modes, shooting scenes determined by the camera are indicated by the icon displayed, and corresponding settings are automatically selected for optimal focusing, subject brightness, and color.

Depending on the scene, continuous images may be shot ( = 34 ).

Background

Subject

People

In Motion

Shadows on Face

Smiling

Sleeping

Babies

Smiling

Sleeping

Children (In Motion)

Other Subjects

In Motion

At Close Range

Normal Backlit

Dark*

Sunsets Spotlights

* Tripod Used

The background color of icons is light blue when the background is a blue sky, dark blue when the background is dark, and gray for all other backgrounds.

The background color of icons is light blue when the background is a blue sky, and gray for all other backgrounds.

• The background color of [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], and [ ] is dark blue, and the background color of [ ] is orange.

• When shooting movies, only People, Other Subjects, and At Close Range icons will be displayed.

• When shooting in [ ] mode, only People, Shadows on Face, Other Subjects, and At

Close Range icons will be displayed.

• When shooting with the self-timer, People (In Motion), Smiling, Sleeping, Babies

(Smiling), Babies (Sleeping), Children, Other Subjects (In Motion) icons will not be displayed.

• When the drive mode is set to [ ] (

= 34 ), and when [Hg Lamp Corr.] is set to

[On] and scenes are automatically corrected (

=

46

), Smiling, Sleeping, Babies

(Smiling), Babies (Sleeping), and Children icons will not be displayed.

• If the flash is set to [ ], the Backlit icons for Smiling and Children will not be displayed.

• Babies, Babies (Smiling), Babies (Sleeping), and Children icons will be displayed when [Face ID] is set to [On], and the face of a registered baby (under two years old) or child (from two to twelve years old) is detected (

= 39 ). Confirm beforehand that

the date and time are correct ( = 14

).

Try shooting in [ G

] mode ( = 67

) if the scene icon does not match actual shooting conditions, or if it is not possible to shoot with your expected effect, color, or brightness.

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

33

Continuous Shooting Scenes

If you shoot a still image when the following scene icons are displayed, the camera will shoot continuously. If you press the shutter button halfway when one of the icons in the table below is displayed, one of the following icons will be displayed to inform you that the camera will shoot continuous images: [ ], [ ], or [

W

].

Smiling (including Babies)

Sleeping (including Babies)

Children

: Consecutive images are captured, and the camera analyzes details such as facial expressions to save the image determined to be the best.

: Beautiful shots of sleeping faces, created by combining consecutive shots to reduce camera shake and image noise.

The AF assist beam will not light up, the flash will not fire, and the shutter sound will not be played.

W : So you don’t miss a photo opportunity of children who move around, the camera will capture three consecutive images for each shot.

In some scenes, expected images may not be saved, and images may not look as expected.

Focus, image brightness, and color are determined by the first shot.

When you want to shoot single images only, press the < m > button, choose

[ ] in the menu, and then select [ ].

Still Images Movies

Image Stabilization Icons

Optimal image stabilization for the shooting conditions is automatically applied (Intelligent IS). Additionally, the following icons are displayed in [ ] and [ ] modes.

Image stabilization for still images

Image stabilization for still images when panning*

Image stabilization for macro shots (Hybrid IS)

Image stabilization for movies, reducing strong camera shake, as when shooting while walking

(Dynamic IS)

Image stabilization for slow camera shake, such as when shooting movies at telephoto

(Powered IS)

No image stabilization, because the camera is mounted on a tripod or held still by other means

* Displayed when you pan, following moving subjects with the camera. When you follow subjects moving horizontally, image stabilization only counteracts vertical camera shake, and horizontal stabilization stops. Similarly, when you follow subjects moving vertically, image stabilization only counteracts horizontal camera shake.

To cancel image stabilization, set [IS Mode] to [Off] (

=

89

). In this case, an

IS icon is not displayed.

In [ ] mode, no [ ] icon is displayed.

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

34

Still Images Movies

On-Screen Frames

In [ ] mode, a variety of frames are displayed once the camera detects subjects you are aiming the camera at.

A white frame is displayed around the subject (or person’s face) determined by the camera to be the main subject, and gray frames are displayed around other detected faces. Frames follow moving subjects within a certain range to keep them in focus.

However, if the camera detects subject movement, only the white frame will remain on the screen.

When you are pressing the shutter button halfway and the camera detects subject movement, a blue frame is displayed, and the focus and image brightness are constantly adjusted (Servo AF).

Try shooting in [ G

] mode ( = 67 ) if no frames are displayed, if

frames are not displayed around desired subjects, or if frames are displayed on the background or similar areas.

Common, Convenient Features

Still Images Movies

Zooming In Closer on Subjects (Digital Zoom)

When distant subjects are too far away to enlarge using the optical zoom, use digital zoom for up to about 20x enlargement.

Zoom Factor

1

Move the zoom lever toward

<

i

>.

z z z z zoom factor (before the image becomes noticeably grainy), which is then indicated on the screen.

2

Move the zoom lever toward

<

i

> again.

z z subject.

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

35

Moving the zoom lever will display the zoom bar (which indicates the zoom position). The color of the zoom bar will change depending on the zoom range.

- White range: optical zoom range where the image will not appear grainy.

- Yellow range: digital zoom range where the image is not noticeably grainy (ZoomPlus).

- Blue range: digital zoom range where the image will appear grainy.

Because the blue range will not be available at some resolution settings (

= 45

), the maximum zoom factor can be achieved by following step 1.

Focal length when optical and digital zoom are combined is as follows (35mm film equivalent).

28 – 140 mm (28 – 560 mm with optical zoom alone)

To deactivate digital zoom, press the < n

> button, choose [Digital Zoom] on the [ 4 ] tab, and then choose [Off].

Still Images Movies

Using the Self-Timer

With the self-timer, you can include yourself in group photos or other timed shots. The camera will shoot about 10 seconds after you press the shutter button.

1

Configure the setting.

z z m > button, choose [ ] in the menu, and then choose the [ ] ] option (

= 24

).

z z ] ] is displayed.

2

Shoot.

z z halfway to focus on the subject, and then press it all the way down.

z z

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

36

z z will blink and the camera will play a selftimer sound.

z z and sound will speed up. (The lamp will remain lit in case the flash fires.) z z triggered the self-timer, press the

< n > button.

z z

[ ] in step 1.

Still Images Movies

Using the Self-Timer to Avoid Camera Shake

This option delays shutter release until about two seconds after you have pressed the shutter button. If the camera is unsteady while you are pressing the shutter button, it will not affect your shot.

z z z

(

=

36

) and choose [

[

].

z displayed.

z z

(

=

36

) to shoot.

[ ] is

Still Images Movies

Customizing the Self-Timer

You can specify the delay (0 – 30 seconds) and number of shots (1 – 10).

1

Choose [

$

].

z z

( = 36 ), choose [

$ ] and press the

< > button.

2

Configure the setting.

z z z

> dial to choose the [Delay] time, either press the < q >< r > buttons or turn the < 7 > dial to choose the number of [Shots], and then press the < m > button.

z z $ ] is z displayed.

Follow step 2 in “Using the Self-Timer”

(

=

36 ) to shoot.

For movies shot using the self-timer, [Delay] represents the delay before recording begins, but the [Shots] setting has no effect.

When you specify multiple shots, image brightness and white balance are determined by the first shot. More time is required between shots when the flash fires or when you have specified to take many shots. Shooting will stop automatically when the memory card becomes full.

When a delay longer than two seconds is specified, two seconds before the shot, the lamp blinking and self-timer sound will speed up. (The lamp will remain lit in case the flash fires.)

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

37

Still Images

Adding a Date Stamp

The camera can add the shooting date to images, in the lower-right corner.

However, note that date stamps cannot be edited or removed, so confirm

beforehand that the date and time are correct ( = 14 ).

1

Configure the setting.

z z n > button, choose [Date

Stamp ] on the [ 4 ] tab, and then choose the desired option (

= 25

).

z z displayed.

2

Shoot.

z z shooting date or time to the lower-right corner of images.

z z

[Off] in step 1.

Date stamps cannot be edited or removed.

Shots taken without adding a date stamp can be printed with one as follows.

However, adding a date stamp this way to images that already have one may cause it to be printed twice.

- Print using printer functions (

= 176

)

-

Use camera DPOF print settings ( = 180

) to print

-

Use the software downloaded from the Canon website to print ( = 173 )

Still Images Movies

Choosing Subjects to Focus On (Tracking AF)

In [AUTO] mode, shoot after choosing a subject to focus on as follows.

1

Specify Tracking AF.

z z o > button.

z z screen.

2

Choose a subject to focus on.

z z desired subject, and then press the shutter button halfway.

z z camera will keep the subject in focus and image brightness adjusted (Servo AF).

3

Shoot.

z z z to shoot.

Press the < o > button to cancel Tracking AF.

Tracking may not be possible when subjects are too small or move too rapidly, or when subject color or brightness matches that of the background too closely.

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

38

Using Face ID

If you register a person ahead of time, the camera will detect that person’s face, and prioritize focus, brightness, and color for that person when shooting. In [ ] mode, the camera can detect babies and children based on registered birthdays and optimize settings for them when shooting.

This function is also useful when searching for a specific registered person among a large number of images (

=

106 ).

Personal Information

Information such as images of a face (face info) registered with Face ID, and personal information (name, birthday) will be saved on the camera.

Additionally, when registered people are detected, their names will be recorded in still images. When using the Face ID function, be careful when sharing the camera or images with others, and when posting images online where many others can view them.

When disposing of a camera or transferring it to another person after using Face ID, be sure to erase all information (registered faces, names, and birthdays) from the camera (

= 44

).

Registering Face ID Information

You can register information (face info, names, birthdays) for up to 12 people to use with Face ID.

1

Access the setting screen.

z z n

> button, choose [Face

ID Settings] on the [ 4 ] tab, and then press the < m > button (

= 25

).

z z o >< p > buttons or turn the

<

7

> dial to choose [Add to Registry], and then press the < m > button.

z z o >< p > buttons or turn the

< 7 > dial to choose [Add a New Face], and then press the < m

> button.

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

39

2

Register face information.

z z person you want to register is inside the gray frame at the center of the screen.

z z indicates that the face is recognized.

Make sure a white frame is displayed on the face, and then shoot.

z z register face information.

z z

< q >< r > buttons or turn the < 7 > dial to choose [OK], and then press the < m

> button.

z z

3

Register the person’s name and

birthday.

z z m > button to access the keyboard, and then enter the name

(

=

26

).

z z screen, choose [Birthday] (either press the < o

>< p

> buttons or turn the <

7

> dial), and then press the < m > button.

z z q

>< r

> buttons to choose an z option.

Press the < o

>< p

> buttons or turn the

< 7 > dial to specify the date.

z z m

> button.

4

Save the settings.

z z o

>< p

> buttons or turn the

< 7 > dial to choose [Save], and then press the < m > button.

z z

< q >< r > buttons or turn the < 7 > dial to choose [Yes], and then press the < m > button.

5

Continue registering face information.

z z information (expressions or angles), repeat step 2.

z z recognized if you add a variety of face information. In addition to a head-on angle, add a slight side angle, a shot when smiling, and shots inside and outside.

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

40

The flash will not fire when following step 2.

If you do not register a birthday in step 3, Babies or Children icons

(

= 33

) will not be displayed in [ ] mode.

You can overwrite registered face info, and add face info later if you have not filled all 5 face info slots (

=

43 ).

Shooting

If you register a person ahead of time, the camera will prioritize that person as the main subject, and optimize focus, brightness, and color for that person when shooting.

z z subject, the names of up to 3 registered people will be displayed when they are detected.

z z z z images. Even if people are detected, but their names are not displayed, the names

(up to 5 people) will be recorded in the image.

People other than those registered may be mistakenly detected as the registered person if they share similar facial features.

Registered people may not be correctly detected if the captured image or scene differs drastically from the registered face information.

If a registered face is not detected, or not easily detected, overwrite registered information with new face info. Registering face info right before shooting will allow for easier detection of registered faces.

If a person is mistakenly detected as another person and you continue shooting, you can edit or erase the name recorded in the image during playback (

= 108

).

Because faces of babies and children change quickly as they grow, you should update their face info regularly (

=

43 ).

When the screen is set to off (

= 23 ), names for detected faces are not

displayed, but they will be recorded with images.

Names will still be recorded in images even if you clear the [Shooting Info]

check box in [Custom Display] (

=

95 ) on the [

4

] tab so that the names are not displayed.

If you don’t want names to be recorded in still images, choose [Face ID

Settings] on the [ 4 ] tab, choose [Face ID], and then choose [Off].

You can check names recorded in images in the playback screen (simple information display) (

= 103

).

In [ ] mode, names are not displayed on the shooting screen, but they will be recorded in still images.

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

41

Checking and Editing Registered Information

1

Access the [Check/Edit Info] screen.

z z

Information” (

= 39

), choose [Check/

Edit Info] and press the < m > button.

2

Choose a person to check or edit.

z z o >< p >< q >< r > buttons or turn the < 7 > dial to choose the person to check or edit, and then press the < m > button.

3

Check or edit the information as needed.

z z the [Edit Profile] screen by pressing the

< o >< p > buttons or turning the < 7 > dial and then pressing the < m > button.

On the screen displayed, you can edit names or birthdays as described in step

3 of “Registering Face ID Information”

( = 40 ).

z z

Info List] (either press the < o >< p > buttons or turn the <

7

> dial), and then press the < m > button. Press the < m > button on the screen displayed, choose face information to erase by pressing the

< o

>< p

>< q

>< r

> buttons or turning the < 7 > dial, and then the < m > button.

After [Erase?] is displayed, choose [OK]

(either press the < q >< r > buttons or turn the <

7

> dial), and then press the < m

> button.

Even if you change names in [Edit Profile], the names recorded in previously shot images will remain the same.

You can use the software to edit registered names. Some characters entered with the software may not display on the camera, but will be correctly recorded in images.

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

42

Overwriting and Adding Face Information

You can overwrite existing face information with new face info. You should update face information regularly, especially with babies and children, as their faces change quickly as they grow.

You can also add face information when all 5 face info slots have not been filled.

1

Access the [Add Face Info] screen.

z z

Information” (

= 39

), choose [Add Face

Info] and press the < m

> button.

2

Choose the name of the person whose face info you want to overwrite.

z z o >< p >< q >< r > buttons or turn the <

7

> dial to choose the name of a person whose face info you want to overwrite, and then press the < m > button.

z z been registered, a message will be displayed. Choose [OK] (either press the

< q >< r > buttons or turn the < 7 > dial), and then press the < m > button.

z z registered, go to step 4 to add face information.

3

Choose the face info to overwrite.

z z o >< p >< q >< r > buttons or turn the < 7 > dial to choose the face info to overwrite, and then press the < m > button.

4

Register face information.

z z

Information” (

=

40 ) to shoot, and then

register the new face information.

z z recognized if you add a variety of face information. In addition to a head-on angle, add a slight side angle, a shot when smiling, and shots inside and outside.

You cannot add face information if all 5 information slots are filled. Follow the steps above to overwrite face information.

You can follow the above steps to register new face info when there is at least one slot open; however, you cannot overwrite any face information. Instead

of overwriting face info, first erase unwanted existing info ( = 42

), and then register new face information (

= 39 ) as needed.

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

43

Erasing Registered Information

You can erase information (face info, names, birthdays) registered to Face

ID. However, names recorded in previously shot images will not be erased.

1

Access the [Erase Info] screen.

z z

Information” (

= 39

) and choose [Erase

Info].

2

Choose the name of the person whose info you want to erase.

z z o

>< p

>< q

>< r

> buttons or turn the < 7 > dial to choose the name of a person to erase, and then press the

< m > button.

z z

< q >< r > buttons or turn the < 7 > dial to choose [OK], and then press the < m

> button.

If you erase a registered person’s info, you will not be able to

display their name ( = 105

), overwrite their info (

= 108 ), or

search images for them ( = 107

).

You can also erase names in image information ( = 109

).

Image Customization Features

Still Images

Changing the Aspect Ratio

Change the image aspect ratio (ratio of width to height) as follows.

z z m > button, choose [ ] in the menu, and choose the desired option

( = 24 ).

z z aspect ratio will be updated.

z z process but choose [ ].

Used for display on widescreen HDTVs or similar display devices.

Same aspect ratio as 35mm film, used for printing images at 5 x 7-inch or postcard sizes.

Native aspect ratio of the camera screen, also used for display on standarddefinition televisions or similar display devices, or for printing images at 3.5 x

5-inch or A-series sizes.

Square aspect ratio.

Aspect ratio commonly used for portraits.

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

Not available in [ ] mode.

44

Still Images

Changing Image Resolution (Size)

Choose from 4 levels of image resolution, as follows. For guidelines on how many shots at each resolution setting can fit on a memory card, see

“Number of 4:3 Shots per Memory Card” ( = 204 ).

z z m > button, choose [ ] in the menu, and choose the desired option

(

= 24

).

z z displayed.

z z process but choose [ ].

Guidelines for Choosing Resolution Based on Paper

Size (for 4:3 Images)

A2 (16.5 x 23.4 in.) z z

A3 – A5 (11.7 x

16.5 – 5.8 x 8.3 in.)

5 x 7 in.

Postcard

3.5 x 5 in.

Not available in [ ] mode.

Still Images

Red-Eye Correction

Red-eye that occurs in flash photography can be automatically corrected as follows.

1

Access the [Built-in Flash

Settings] screen.

z z n > button, choose [Flash

Control] on the [ 4 ] tab, and then press the < m

> button ( = 25 ).

2

Configure the setting.

z z z choose [On] (

=

25

).

z displayed.

z z

R ] is process but choose [Off].

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

Red-eye correction may be applied to image areas other than eyes

(if the camera misinterprets red eye makeup as red pupils, for example).

45

You can also correct existing images (

= 121

).

You can also access the screen in step 2 by holding down the < r > button for at least one second.

You can also access the screen in step 2 when the flash is up by pressing the

< r > button and immediately pressing the < n > button.

Still Images

Correcting Greenish Image Areas from

Mercury Lamps

In [ ] mode, subjects or background in shots of evening scenes illuminated by mercury lamps may appear to have a greenish tinge. This greenish tinge can be corrected automatically when shooting, using Multiarea White Balance.

z z n > button, choose [Hg

Lamp Corr.] on the [ 4 ] tab, and then

choose [On] ( = 25 ).

z z z displayed.

To restore the original setting, repeat this process but choose [Off].

After you are finished shooting under mercury lamps, you should set

[Hg Lamp Corr.] back to [Off]. Otherwise, green hues not caused by mercury lamps may be corrected by mistake.

Try taking some test shots first to make sure you obtain the desired results.

Movies

Changing Movie Image Quality

4 image quality settings are available. For guidelines on the maximum movie length at each level of image quality that will fit on a memory card,

see “Recording Time per Memory Card” ( = 205 ).

z z m > button, choose [ in the menu, and choose the desired option (

= 24

).

z z displayed.

z z process but choose [ ].

]

Image

Quality

Resolution Frame Rate Details

1920 x 1080* 60 fps

[

For shooting in Full HD

] enables movies with smoother motion

1920 x 1080* 30 fps

1280 x 720 30 fps For shooting in HD

640 x 480 30 fps

For shooting in standard definition

* Fine Detail Movie Processing (This function quickly processes a large amount of information, making it possible to record even finer details in movies.)

In [ ], [ ], and [ ] modes, black bars displayed on the top and bottom edges of the screen indicate image areas not recorded.

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

46

Helpful Shooting Features

Still Images

Using the Dual Axis Electronic Level

Movies

An electronic level can be displayed as a guideline to ensure the camera is level from front to back and left to right.

1

Display the electronic level.

z z p > button several times to display the electronic level.

2

Straighten the camera.

z z red line changes to green.

Back or

Forward

Left or Right

If the electronic level is not displayed in step 1, press the < n > button, and on the [

4

] tab, choose [Custom Display]. Add a [ ] to [ ] or [ ] to choose the electronic level.

The electronic level is not displayed during movie recording.

If you hold the camera vertically, the orientation of the electronic level will be updated automatically to match the camera orientation.

Calibrate the electronic level if it seems ineffective in helping you level the

camera ( = 155 ).

Still Images

Magnifying the Area in Focus

You can check the focus by pressing the shutter button halfway, which will enlarge the portion of the image in focus in the AF frame.

1

Configure the setting.

z z n > button, choose [AF-

Point Zoom] on the [ 4 ] tab, and then choose [On] (

= 25

).

2

Check the focus.

z z face detected as the main subject is now magnified.

z z

[Off] in step 1.

The area in focus will not be magnified when you press the shutter button halfway if a face was not detected, if the person is too close to the camera and their face is too large for the screen, or if the camera detects subject movement.

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

47

The display will not magnify when using the digital zoom ( = 35

), Tracking

AF (

=

82

), or when using a TV as a display (

=

163

).

Not available in [ ] mode.

Still Images

Checking for Closed Eyes

[ ] is displayed when the camera detects that people may have closed their eyes.

1

Configure the setting.

z z n > button, choose [Blink

Detection] on the [ 4 ] tab, and then

choose [On] (

=

25 ).

2

Shoot.

z z

] flashes when the camera detects a z person whose eyes are closed.

To restore the original setting, choose

[Off] in step 1.

When you have specified multiple shots in [ $ ] mode, this function is only available for the final shot.

A frame is displayed around people whose eyes are closed when you have selected [2 sec.], [4 sec.], [8 sec.], or [Hold] in [Display Time] (

= 49 ).

This feature is not available during continuous shooting in [ ] mode

( = 76

).

Customizing Camera Operation

Customize shooting functions on the MENU [ 4 ] tab as follows.

For instructions on menu functions, see “Using Menus” (

=

25 ).

Still Images

Deactivating the AF-Assist Beam

You can deactivate the lamp that normally lights up to help you focus when you press the shutter button halfway in low-light conditions.

z z n > button, choose [AFassist Beam] on the [

4

] tab, and then choose [Off] (

= 25

).

z z process but choose [On].

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

48

Still Images

Deactivating the Red-Eye Reduction Lamp

You can deactivate the red-eye reduction lamp that lights up to reduce redeye when the flash is used in low-light shots.

1

Access the [Built-in Flash

Settings] screen.

z z n > button, choose [Flash

Control] on the [ 4 ] tab, and then press the < m > button (

= 25

).

2

Configure the setting.

z z

choose [Off] ( = 25 ).

z z process but choose [On].

Still Images

Changing the Image Display Style after Shots

You can change how long images are displayed and what information is displayed immediately after shooting.

Changing the Image Display Period after Shots

1

Access the [Review image after shooting] screen.

z z n > button, choose

[Review image after shooting] on the

[ 4 ] tab, and then press the < m > button

( = 25 ).

2

Configure the setting.

z z o >< p > buttons or turn the <

7

> dial to choose [Display Time].

Press the < q >< r > buttons to choose the desired option.

z z process but choose [Quick].

Quick Displays images only until you can shoot again.

2 sec., 4 sec.,

8 sec.

Displays images for the specified time. Even while the shot is displayed, you can take another shot by pressing the shutter button halfway again.

Hold

Off

Displays images until you press the shutter button halfway.

No image display after shots.

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

49

Changing the Screen Displayed after Shots

Change the way images are displayed after shots as follows.

Off

Detailed

1

Set [Display Time] to [2 sec.],

[4 sec.], [8 sec.], or [Hold]

(

=

49

).

2

Configure the setting.

z z o >< p > buttons or turn the

< 7 > dial to choose [Display Info]. Press the < q >< r > buttons to choose the desired option.

z z process but choose [Off].

Displays only the image.

Displays shooting details (

=

192

).

When [Display Time] ( = 49

) is set to [Off] or [Quick], [Display Info] is set to

[Off] and cannot be changed.

By pressing the < p > button while an image is displayed after shooting, you can switch the display information. Note that the settings of [Display Info] are not changed. You can also delete the image, by pressing the < a > button.

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

50

3

Other Shooting Modes

Shoot more effectively in various scenes, and take shots enhanced with unique image effects or captured using special functions

Specific Scenes ................................................

52

Image Effects (Creative Filters) ......................

54

Shooting High-Contrast Scenes

(High Dynamic Range) ..........................................

55

Shooting with Faded Colors (Nostalgic) ................

56

Shooting with a Fish-Eye Lens Effect

(Fish-Eye Effect) ...................................................

56

Shots Resembling Miniature Models

(Miniature Effect) ...................................................

57

Shooting with a Toy Camera Effect

(Toy Camera Effect) ..............................................

58

Making Subjects Stand Out

(Background Defocus) ..........................................

58

Shooting with a Soft Focus Effect .........................

59

Shooting in Monochrome ......................................

59

Special Modes for Other Purposes ................

60

Auto Shooting after Face Detection

(Smart Shutter) ......................................................

60

Shooting Starry Skies (Star) ..................................

62

Shooting Various Movies ................................

65

Shooting Movies in [

E

] Mode ..............................

65

Shooting Super Slow Motion Movies ....................

66

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

51

Specific Scenes

Choose a mode matching the shooting scene, and the camera will automatically configure the settings for optimal shots.

1

Enter [

K

] mode.

z z K ].

2

Choose a shooting mode.

z z m > button, choose [ I ] in the menu, and then choose a shooting mode

(

= 24

).

3

Shoot.

Still Images Movies

I

Shoot portraits (Portrait)

z z effect.

Still Images

Shoot evening scenes without using a tripod (Handheld

NightScene)

z z portraits with evening scenery in the background, without the need to hold the camera very still (as with a tripod).

z z consecutive shots, reducing camera shake and image noise.

Still Images Movies

S

Shoot underwater (Underwater)

z z underwater scenery, when you use an optional waterproof case (

= 162 ).

z z match the effect of using a commercially available color-compensating filter

( = 74 ).

Still Images Movies

P

Shoot with snowy backgrounds

(Snow)

z z against snowy backgrounds.

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

52

Still Images Movies t

Shoot fireworks (Fireworks)

z z

Subjects appear larger in [ ] mode compared to other modes.

In [ ] and [ S ] modes, shots may look grainy because the ISO speed (

= 70

) is increased to suit the shooting conditions.

Because the camera will shoot continuously in [ ] mode, hold it steady while shooting.

In [ ] mode, excessive camera shake or certain shooting conditions may prevent you from obtaining the desired results.

In [ t ] mode, mount the camera on a tripod or take other measures to keep it still and prevent camera shake. Additionally, you should set [IS Mode] to [Off] when using a tripod or other means to secure

the camera ( = 89 ).

When you use a tripod for evening scenes, shooting in [ of [ ] mode will give better results (

= 29

).

] mode instead

In [ t ] mode, although no frames are displayed when you press the shutter button halfway, optimal focus is still determined.

Still Images

Shooting with an Underwater Focusing Range

If focusing is difficult in [ S

] mode ( = 52 ) with a focus range of [ ],

using a focus range designed for underwater shooting can ensure optimal underwater shots.

1

Configure the setting.

z z

( = 52 ) and choose [

S ].

z z q > button, choose the desired focus range (either press the < q >< r > buttons or turn the <

7

> dial), and then press the < m > button.

2

Shoot.

Focusing Range

Underwater

Macro

8 Quick

Description

Take close-ups of sea life, using the digital zoom for even closer shots.

Avoid missing unexpected underwater shooting opportunities when shooting subjects some distance away. Especially effective for moving subjects.

Refer to “Shooting Range” ( = 205 ) for details on the range of each focus

range.

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

53

In [ ] mode, optical zoom is set to maximum wide angle.

In [ ] mode, use of digital zoom may cause images to appear

grainy at some resolutions ( = 45 ).

In [ 8 ] mode, subjects at close range may not be in focus. In this case, try setting the focus range to [ ].

[ ] and [

8

] are not available in [Tracking AF] AF frame mode (

= 38 ).

Image Effects (Creative Filters)

Add a variety of effects to images when shooting.

1

Enter [ ] mode.

z z

2

Choose a shooting mode.

z z m

> button, choose [ ] in the menu, and then choose a shooting

mode ( = 24 ).

3

Shoot.

Still Images

Shoot in vivid colors

(Super Vivid)

z z

Movies

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

54

Still Images Movies

Posterized shots (Poster Effect)

z z illustration.

In [ ] and [ ] modes, try taking some test shots first, to make sure you obtain the desired results.

Still Images

Shooting High-Contrast Scenes

(High Dynamic Range)

Three consecutive images are captured at different brightness levels each time you shoot, and the camera combines image areas with optimal brightness to create a single image. This mode can reduce the washed-out highlights and loss of detail in shadows that tends to occur in high-contrast shots.

1

Choose [ ].

z z

(Creative Filters)” (

= 54

) and choose

[ ].

2

Shoot.

z z

When you press the shutter button all the way down, the camera will take three shots and combine them.

Excessive camera shake or certain shooting conditions may prevent you from obtaining the desired results.

If excessive camera shake interferes with shooting, mount the camera on a tripod or take other measures to keep it still. Additionally, you should set

[IS Mode] to [Off] when using a tripod or other means to secure the camera

(

=

89 ).

Any subject movement will cause images to look blurry.

There will be a delay before you can shoot again, as the camera processes and combines the images.

Adding Artistic Effects

z z

(Creative Filters)” ( = 54 ) and choose

[ ].

z z > button, choose an effect

(either press the < q >< r > buttons or turn the < 7 > dial), and then press the < > button again.

Natural

Art Standard

Art Vivid

Art Bold

Art Embossed

Images are natural and organic.

Images resemble paintings, with subdued contrast.

Images resemble vivid illustrations.

Images resemble oil paintings, with bold edges.

Images resemble old photos, with bold edges and dark ambiance.

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

55

Still Images

Shooting with Faded Colors (Nostalgic)

Movies

This effect makes colors look faded and images look weathered, as in old photographs. Choose from five effect levels.

1

Choose [ ].

z z

(Creative Filters)” (

= 54

) and choose

[ ].

2

Choose an effect level.

z z z

> dial to choose an effect z level.

A preview is shown of how your shot will look with the effect applied.

3

Shoot.

Try taking some test shots first, to make sure you obtain the desired results.

Colors will look faded on the shooting screen, but the image aging effect is not shown. Review the image in Playback mode to see the effect (

= 102 ).

The image aging effect is not shown in movies.

Shooting with a Fish-Eye Lens Effect

(Fish-Eye Effect)

Still Images

Shoot with the distorting effect of a fish-eye lens.

1

Choose [ ].

z z

(Creative Filters)” ( = 54 ) and choose

[ ].

2

Choose an effect level.

z z z > dial to choose an effect z level.

A preview is shown of how your shot will look with the effect applied.

3

Shoot.

Try taking some test shots first, to make sure you obtain the desired results.

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

56

Still Images

Shots Resembling Miniature Models

(Miniature Effect)

Movies

Creates the effect of a miniature model, by blurring image areas above and below your selected area.

You can also make movies that look like scenes in miniature models by choosing the playback speed before the movie is recorded. People and objects in the scene will move quickly during playback. Note that sound is not recorded.

1

Choose [ ].

z z

(Creative Filters)” (

= 54

) and choose

[ ].

z z image area that will not be blurred.

2

Choose the area to keep in focus.

z z > button.

z z and turn the < 7 > dial to move it.

3

For movies, choose the movie playback speed.

z z z > dial to choose the speed.

4

Return to the shooting screen and shoot.

z z > button to return to the shooting screen, and then shoot.

Playback Speed and Estimated Playback Time

(for One-Minute Clips)

Speed Playback Time

Approx. 12 sec.

Approx. 6 sec.

Approx. 3 sec.

The zoom is not available when shooting movies. Be sure to set the zoom before shooting.

Try taking some test shots first, to make sure you obtain the desired results.

To switch the orientation of the frame to vertical, press the < q >< r > buttons in step 2. To return the frame to horizontal orientation, press the < o >< p > buttons.

Holding the camera vertically will change the orientation of the frame.

Movie image quality is [ ] at an aspect ratio of [ ] and [ ] at an aspect ratio of [ ] (

= 44 ). These quality settings cannot be changed.

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

57

Still Images

Shooting with a Toy Camera Effect

(Toy Camera Effect)

This effect makes images resemble shots from a toy camera by vignetting

(darker, blurred image corners) and changing the overall color.

1

Choose [ ].

z z

(Creative Filters)” (

= 54

) and choose

[ ].

2

Choose a color tone.

z z z > dial to choose a color tone.

z z look with the effect applied.

3

Shoot.

Standard Shots resemble toy camera images.

Warm Images have a warmer tone than with [Standard].

Cool Images have a cooler tone than with [Standard].

Try taking some test shots first, to make sure you obtain the desired results.

Still Images

Making Subjects Stand Out

(Background Defocus)

Two consecutive images are captured each time you shoot and processed into a single image, so that the subject stands out against a blurred background.

1

Choose [ ].

z z

(Creative Filters)” ( = 54 ) and choose

[ ].

2

Shoot.

z z

When you press the shutter button all the way down, the camera will shoot twice and process the images.

z z images could not be processed.

Excessive camera shake or certain shooting conditions may prevent you from obtaining the desired results.

For the best results with this effect, try shooting close to the subject, and ensure ample distance between the subject and background.

There will be a delay before you can shoot again, as the camera processes the images.

To adjust the effect level, turn the < z > dial.

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

58

Still Images

Shooting with a Soft Focus Effect

This function allows you to shoot images as if a soft focus filter were attached to the camera. You can adjust the effect level as desired.

1

Choose [ ].

z z

(Creative Filters)” (

= 54

) and choose

[ ].

2

Choose an effect level.

z z z

> dial to choose an effect z level.

A preview is shown of how your shot will look with the effect applied.

3

Shoot.

Try taking some test shots first, to make sure you obtain the desired results.

Still Images

Shooting in Monochrome

Shoot images in black and white, sepia, or blue and white.

B/W

Sepia

Blue

Movies

Black and white shots.

Sepia tone shots.

Blue and white shots.

1

Choose [ ].

z z

(Creative Filters)” ( = 54 ) and choose

[ ].

2

Choose a color tone.

z z z > dial to choose a color tone.

z z look with the effect applied.

3

Shoot.

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

59

Special Modes for Other Purposes

Still Images

Auto Shooting after Face Detection

(Smart Shutter)

Auto Shooting after Smile Detection

The camera shoots automatically after detecting a smile, even without you pressing the shutter button.

1

Choose [ ].

z z

(

= 52

) and choose [ ], and then press the < > button.

z z q >< r > buttons or turn the

< 7 > dial to choose [ ], and then press the < > button.

z z mode, and [Smile Detection on] is displayed.

2

Aim the camera at a person.

z z will shoot after the lamp lights up.

z z p > button. Press the < p > button again to resume detection.

Switch to another mode when you finish shooting, or the camera will continue shooting each time a smile is detected.

You can also shoot as usual by pressing the shutter button.

The camera can detect smiles more easily when subjects face the camera and open their mouth wide enough so that teeth are visible.

To change the number of shots, press the < o >< p > buttons after choosing

[ ] in step 1. [Blink Detection] (

= 48 ) is only available for the final shot.

Still Images

Using the Wink Self-Timer

Aim the camera at a person and press the shutter button all the way down.

The camera will shoot about two seconds after a wink is detected.

1

Choose [ ].

z z

( = 52 ) and choose [ ], and then

press the < > button.

z z q >< r > buttons or turn the

<

7

> dial to choose [ ], and then press the < > button.

2

Compose the shot and press the shutter button halfway.

z z around the face of the person who will wink.

3

Press the shutter button all the way down.

z z mode, and [Wink to take picture] is displayed.

z z is played.

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

60

4

Face the camera and wink.

z z after detecting a wink by the person whose face is inside the frame.

z z triggered the self-timer, press the

< n > button.

If the wink is not detected, wink again slowly and deliberately.

Winking may not be detected if eyes are obscured by hair, a hat, or glasses.

Closing and opening both eyes at once will also be detected as a wink.

If winking is not detected, the camera will shoot about 15 seconds later.

To change the number of shots, press the < o

>< p

> buttons after choosing

[

] in step 1. [Blink Detection] ( = 48

) is only available for the final shot.

If no one is in the shooting area when the shutter button is pressed all the way down, the camera will shoot after a person enters the shooting area and winks.

Still Images

Using the Face Self-Timer

The camera will shoot about two seconds after detecting that the face of another person (such as the photographer) has entered the shooting area

(

= 82

). This is useful when including yourself in group photos or similar shots.

1

Choose [ ].

z z

(

= 52

) and choose [ ], and then press the < > button.

z z q >< r > buttons or turn the

< 7 > dial to choose [ ], and then press the < > button.

2

Compose the shot and press the shutter button halfway.

z z around the face you focus on and white frames around other faces.

3

Press the shutter button all the way down.

z z mode, and [Look straight at camera to start count down] is displayed.

z z is played.

4

Join the subjects in the shooting area and look at the camera.

z z lamp blinking and self-timer sound will speed up. (When the flash fires, the lamp will remain lit.) About two seconds later, the camera will shoot.

z z triggered the self-timer, press the

< n > button.

Even if your face is not detected after you join the others in the shooting area, the camera will shoot about 15 seconds later.

To change the number of shots, press the < o >< p > buttons after choosing

[

] in step 1. [Blink Detection] (

= 48 ) is only available for the final shot.

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

61

Shooting Starry Skies (Star)

Still Images

Shooting Night Scenes under Starry Skies

(Star Nightscape)

Capture impressive shots of starry skies above night scenes. Starlight in the image is automatically enhanced, making starry skies look beautiful.

1

Choose [ ].

z z

(

= 52

) and choose [ ], and then press the < > button.

z z q >< r > buttons or turn the

< 7 > dial to choose [ ], and then press the < m

> button.

2

Secure the camera.

z z other measures to keep it still and prevent camera shake.

3

Shoot.

Optical zoom is set to maximum wide angle and cannot be adjusted.

There will be a delay before you can shoot again, as the camera processes and combines the images.

To disable image processing that makes stars more prominent, choose MENU

► [ 4 ] tab ► [Star Emphasis] ► [Off].

Set [Night Display] to [On] (

= 90 ) in this mode.

Switch to manual focus mode (

=

78 ) to more accurately specify the focal

position before shooting.

This mode can correct white balance and match the effect of using a

commercially available color-compensating filter ( = 74

).

Still Images

Shooting Star Trails (Star Trails)

Streaks created by the movement of stars through the sky are recorded in a single image. After determining the shutter speed and number of shots, the camera shoots continuously. Each shooting session lasts up to about two hours. Check the battery level in advance.

1

Choose [ ].

z z

(

=

52 ) and choose [ ], and then

press the < > button.

z z q

>< r

> buttons or turn the

< 7 > dial to choose [ ], and then press the < m > button.

2

Specify the duration of the shooting session.

z z z > dial to choose the shooting duration.

3

Secure the camera.

z z other measures to keep it still.

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

62

4

Shoot.

z z down. [Busy] is displayed briefly, and then shooting begins.

z z z z button all the way down again.

If the camera runs out of battery power, shooting stops and a composite image created from the images up to that point is saved.

Optical zoom is set to maximum wide angle and cannot be adjusted.

There will be a delay before you can shoot again, as the camera processes and combines the images.

Set [Night Display] to [On] ( = 90

) in this mode.

Switch to manual focus mode (

=

78

) to more accurately specify the focal position before shooting.

This mode can correct white balance and match the effect of using a commercially available color-compensating filter (

= 74 ).

Movies

Shooting Movies of Star Movement

(Star Time-Lapse Movie)

Still images are captured continuously over a specified duration and combined to create a movie. The camera shoots once each minute, and no sound is recorded.

Stars move quickly during playback, so you can view their movement in a short time. Each shooting session lasts up to about two hours, and many shots are taken. Check the battery level and memory card space in advance.

1

Choose [ ].

z z

( = 52 ) and choose [ ], and then

press the < > button.

z z q >< r > buttons or turn the

<

7

> dial to choose [ ], and then press the < m > button.

2

Specify the duration of the shooting session.

z z z > dial to choose the shooting duration.

3

Secure the camera.

z z other measures to keep it still.

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

63

4

Check the brightness.

z z z to shoot a single still image.

z check image brightness.

=

101

) and z z compensation dial and change the exposure level. Check brightness again by taking another shot.

5

Shoot.

z z displayed briefly, and then shooting begins.

z z z z shooting session.

z z button again.

z z

(

=

152

) while shooting.

Estimated Shooting and Playback Times

Session Time

[120']

[90']

[60']

Approx. 8 sec.

Playback Time

Approx. 6 sec.

Approx. 4 sec.

If the camera runs out of battery power or memory card space, shooting stops and a movie created from the images up to that point is saved.

Maximum available shooting duration varies depending on free space on the memory card.

Optical zoom is set to maximum wide angle and cannot be adjusted.

There will be a delay before you can shoot again, as the camera processes the images.

To save each shot collected before the movie is created, choose MENU ►

[

4

] tab ► [Save Stills] ► [On]. Note that these individual images are managed as a single group, and during playback, only the first image is displayed. To indicate that the image is part of a group, [ ] is displayed in the upper left of the screen. If you erase a grouped image (

= 114 ), all

images in the group are also erased. Be careful when erasing images.

Set [Night Display] to [On] (

= 90 ) in this mode.

Switch to manual focus mode (

= 78 ) to more accurately specify the focal

position before shooting.

This mode can correct white balance and match the effect of using a

commercially available color-compensating filter ( = 74

).

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

64

Movies

Shooting Various Movies

Shooting Movies in [

E

] Mode

1

Enter [

E

] mode.

z z E ].

z z bottom edges of the screen, and the subject is slightly enlarged. These areas will not be recorded.

2

Configure the settings to suit

the movie (

=

193

201

).

3

Shoot.

z z z z button again.

Movies

Locking or Changing Image Brightness before Shooting

Before shooting, you can lock the exposure or change it in 1/3-stop increments within a range of –3 to +3.

1

Lock the exposure.

z z exposure. The exposure shift bar is displayed.

z z button again.

2

Adjust the exposure.

z z 7 > dial to adjust the exposure, as you watch the screen.

3

Shoot (

=

65

).

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

65

Movies

Shooting Super Slow Motion Movies

You can shoot fast-moving subjects for playback later in slow motion. Note that sound is not recorded.

1

Choose [ ].

z z E ].

z z m > button, choose [ E ] in the menu, and then choose [ ]

(

= 24

).

2

Choose a frame rate.

z z

rate ( = 24 ).

m

> button, choose [ ] in the menu, and choose the desired frame z z displayed.

3

Shoot (

=

65

).

z z displayed. Maximum clip length is approx.

30 sec.

Frame Rate

240 fps

120 fps

Image Quality

(320 x 240)

(640 x 480)

Playback Time (For a 30sec. Clip)

Approx. 4 min.

Approx. 2 min.

Zooming is not available during recording, even if you move the zoom lever.

Focus, exposure, and color are determined when you press the movie button.

When you play the movie (

= 102

), it will be played back in slow motion.

You can change the playback speed of movies by using the software

(

= 173

).

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

66

4

P Mode

More discerning shots, in your preferred shooting style

Instructions in this chapter apply to the camera with the mode dial set to [ G ] mode.

[ G ]: Program AE; AE: Auto Exposure

Before using a function introduced in this chapter in modes other than [ G ], make sure the function is available in that mode

(

= 193 –

201 ).

Shooting in Program AE ([P] Mode) ...............

68

Image Brightness (Exposure) .........................

68

Adjusting Image Brightness

(Exposure Compensation) ....................................

68

Locking Image Brightness / Exposure

(AE Lock) ..............................................................

69

Changing the Metering Method .............................

69

Changing the ISO Speed ......................................

70

Changing the Noise Reduction Level

(High ISO NR) .......................................................

71

Auto Exposure Bracketing (AEB Shooting) ...........

72

Correcting Image Brightness (i-Contrast) ..............

72

Using the ND Filter ................................................

73

Color and Continuous Shooting .....................

74

Adjusting White Balance .......................................

74

Changing Image Color Tones (My Colors) ............

75

Continuous Shooting .............................................

76

Shooting Range and Focusing .......................

77

Shooting at Preset Focal Lengths

(Step Zoom) ..........................................................

77

Shooting Close-Ups (Macro) .................................

78

Shooting in Manual Focus Mode ...........................

78

Digital Tele-Converter ............................................

80

Changing the AF Frame Mode ..............................

81

Changing the Focus Setting ..................................

84

Choosing a Person to Focus On (Face Select) .....

84

Shooting with the AF Lock .....................................

85

Flash ..................................................................

85

Changing the Flash Mode .....................................

85

Adjusting the Flash Exposure Compensation .......

86

Shooting with the FE Lock ....................................

87

Changing the Flash Timing ...................................

87

Shooting RAW Images .....................................

88

Other Settings ..................................................

89

Changing the Compression Ratio

(Image Quality) ......................................................

89

Changing the IS Mode Settings ............................

89

Switching the Color of Shooting-Screen

Information ............................................................

90

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

67

Still Images Movies

Shooting in Program AE ([P] Mode)

You can customize many function settings to suit your preferred shooting style.

1

Enter [

G

] mode.

z z G

].

2

Customize the settings as

desired (

=

68

90

), and then shoot.

If adequate exposure cannot be obtained when you press the shutter button halfway, shutter speeds and aperture values are displayed in orange. In this case, try adjusting the ISO speed (

= 70 ) or activating the flash (if subjects

are dark, = 85

), which may enable adequate exposure.

Movies can be recorded in [ G ] mode as well, by pressing the movie button.

However, some FUNC. (

= 24 ) and MENU (

= 25

) settings may be automatically adjusted for movie recording.

For details on the shooting range in [ G

] mode, see “Shooting Range”

( = 205 ).

Image Brightness (Exposure)

Still Images

Adjusting Image Brightness

(Exposure Compensation)

The standard exposure set by the camera can be adjusted in 1/3-stop increments, in a range of –3 to +3.

z z exposure compensation dial to adjust brightness.

z z displayed.

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

68

Locking Image Brightness / Exposure

(AE Lock)

Still Images

Before shooting, you can lock the exposure, or you can specify focus and exposure separately.

1

Lock the exposure.

z z with the exposure locked, and then press the < > button.

z z locked.

2

Compose the shot and shoot.

z z no longer displayed.

AE: Auto Exposure

After the exposure is locked, you can adjust the combination of shutter speed and aperture value by turning the < 7 > dial (Program Shift).

Still Images

Changing the Metering Method

Adjust the metering method (how brightness is measured) to suit shooting conditions as follows.

z z m > button, choose [ ] in the menu, and choose the desired option

( = 24

).

z z displayed.

Evaluative

Center

Weighted Avg.

For typical shooting conditions, including backlit shots.

Automatically adjusts exposure to match the shooting conditions.

Determines the average brightness of light across the entire image area, calculated by treating brightness in the central area as more important.

Spot

Metering restricted to within the [ ] (Spot AE Point frame). You

can also link the Spot AE Point frame to the AF frame ( = 70

).

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

69

Still Images

Linking the Spot AE Point Frame to the AF Frame

1

Set the metering method to [ ].

z z

Metering Method” (

=

69 ) to choose

[ ].

2

Configure the setting.

z z n > button, choose

[Spot AE Point] on the [ 4 ] tab, and then choose [AF Point] (

=

25

).

z z linked to the movement of the AF frame

(

= 81

).

Not available when [AF Frame] is set to [Face AiAF] (

=

82

) or

[Tracking AF] (

= 82

).

Still Images

Changing the ISO Speed

z z > button, turn the < 7 > dial to choose the ISO speed, and then press the < m > button.

z z displayed.

AUTO

80, 100, 125, 160, 200

250, 320, 400, 500, 640, 800

1000, 1250, 1600, 2000, 2500,

3200, 4000, 5000, 6400, 8000,

10000, 12800

Automatically adjusts the ISO speed to suit the shooting mode and conditions.

For shooting outdoors in fair weather.

Low For shooting in cloudy conditions, or at twilight.

High

For shooting night scenes, or in dark rooms.

To view the automatically set ISO speed when the camera is set to [AUTO], press the shutter button halfway.

Although choosing a lower ISO speed may reduce image graininess, there may be a greater risk of subject blurriness in some shooting conditions.

Choosing a higher ISO speed will increase shutter speed, which may reduce subject blurriness and increase the flash range. However, shots may look grainy.

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

70

Still Images

Adjusting ISO Auto Settings

When the camera is set to [AUTO], maximum ISO speed can be specified in a range of [400] – [12800], and sensitivity can be specified in a range of three levels.

1

Access the setting screen.

z z n > button, choose [ISO

Auto Settings] on the [

4

] tab, and then press the < m

> button ( = 25 ).

2

Configure the setting.

z z then choose the desired option (

= 25

).

You can also access the [ISO Auto Settings] screen when the ISO speed setting screen (

=

70 ) is displayed, by pressing the <

n

> button.

Changing the Noise Reduction Level

(High ISO NR)

You can choose from 3 levels of noise reduction: [Standard], [High], [Low].

This function is especially effective when shooting at high ISO speeds.

z z n > button, choose [High

ISO NR] on the [

4

] tab, and then choose the desired option (

= 25

).

Not available with [ ] or [

] ( = 88

).

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

71

Still Images

Auto Exposure Bracketing (AEB Shooting)

Three consecutive images are captured at different exposure levels

(standard exposure, underexposure, and then overexposure) each time you shoot. You can adjust the amount of underexposure and overexposure

(relative to standard exposure) from –2 to +2 stops in 1/3-stop increments.

1

Choose [ ].

z z m > button, choose

[ ] in the menu, and then choose [ ]

(

= 24

).

2

Configure the setting.

z z the setting by pressing the < q >< r > buttons or turning the < 7 > dial.

AEB shooting is only available in [ !

] mode (

= 86

).

Continuous shooting (

=

76

) is not available in this mode.

If exposure compensation is already in use (

=

68 ), the value specified for

that function is treated as the standard exposure level for this function.

You can also access the setting screen of step 2 by pressing the < n > button when the exposure compensation screen (

= 68

) is displayed.

Three shots are taken, regardless of any quantity specified in [

$

] (

=

37

).

In [Blink Detection] mode ( = 48

), this function is only available for the final shot.

Still Images

Correcting Image Brightness (i-Contrast)

Before shooting, excessively bright or dark image areas (such as faces or backgrounds) can be detected and automatically adjusted to the optimal brightness.

To avoid washed-out highlights, specify Dynamic Range Correction. To preserve image detail in shadows, specify Shadow Correct.

Under some shooting conditions, correction may be inaccurate or may cause images to appear grainy.

You can also correct existing images ( = 120 ).

You can customize camera operation so that turning the < z > or < 7 > dial

adjusts DR Correction or Shadow Correct settings ( = 96

).

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

72

Still Images

Dynamic Range Correction (DR Correction)

Tone down bright image areas, which might otherwise look washed out, as follows.

z z m > button, choose [ ] in the menu, and choose the desired option

(

=

24 ).

Option Details

Automatic adjustment to prevent washed-out highlights

Tone down highlights by about 200% relative to the brightness level of [ ].

Tone down highlights by about 400% relative to the brightness level of [ ].

Available ISO Speed

(

=

70

)

AUTO, 80 – 12800

AUTO, 160 – 3200

AUTO, 320 – 3200

ISO speed ( = 70 ) will be adjusted to a speed within the

supported range if you have specified a value outside the supported range indicated here.

Still Images

Shadow Correct

Automatically preserve image detail in shadows as follows.

z z m

> button, choose

[ ] in the menu, and then choose [ ]

( = 24 ).

z z ] is displayed.

Using the ND Filter

To shoot at slower shutter speeds and smaller aperture values, use the

ND filter, which reduces light intensity to 1/8 the actual level (equivalent to

3 stops).

z z m > button, choose

[ ] in the menu, and then choose [ ]

( = 24

).

Mount the camera on a tripod or take other measures to keep it still and prevent camera shake. Additionally, you should set [IS Mode] to [Off] when using a tripod or other means to secure the camera

( = 89 ).

ND: Neutral Density

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

73

Color and Continuous Shooting

Still Images Movies

Adjusting White Balance

By adjusting white balance (WB), you can make image colors look more natural for the scene you are shooting.

z z m > button, choose [ ] in the menu, and choose the desired option

(

= 24

).

z z displayed.

h

Auto

Day Light

Cloudy

Tungsten

Fluorescent

Fluorescent H

Flash

S

Underwater

Custom

Automatically sets the optimal white balance for the shooting conditions.

For shooting outdoors in fair weather.

For shooting in cloudy conditions, in the shade, or at twilight.

For shooting under ordinary incandescent (tungsten) lighting and similarly colored fluorescent lighting.

For shooting under warm-white (or similarly colored) or coolwhite fluorescent lighting.

For shooting under daylight fluorescent and similarly colored fluorescent lighting.

For shooting with the flash.

Sets the optimal white balance for shooting underwater. Tones down blues to produce natural-looking colors overall.

For manually setting a custom white balance (

=

74 ).

Still Images Movies

Custom White Balance

For image colors that look natural under the light in your shot, adjust white balance to suit the light source where you are shooting. Set the white balance under the same light source that will illuminate your shot.

z z z

Balance” (

= 74

) to choose [ ] or [ ].

Aim the camera at a plain white subject, so that the entire screen is white. Press the < > button.

z z white balance data has been recorded.

Colors may look unnatural if you change camera settings after recording white balance data.

Still Images Movies

Manually Correcting White Balance

You can manually correct white balance. This adjustment can match the effect of using a commercially available color temperature conversion filter or color-compensating filter.

1

Configure the setting.

z z

Balance” (

=

74

) to choose the white balance option.

z z z > dial to adjust the z correction level for B and A.

Once the setting is complete, [ ] is displayed.

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

74

2

Configure advanced settings.

z z press the < n > button and turn the < z > or < 7 > dial to adjust the correction level.

z z

< > button.

z z n > button to complete the setting.

The camera will retain white balance correction levels even if you switch to another white balance option in step 1, but correction levels will be reset if you record custom white balance data.

B: blue; A: amber; M: magenta; G: green

One level of blue/amber correction is equivalent to about 7 mireds on a color temperature conversion filter. (Mired: Color temperature unit representing color temperature conversion filter density)

You can customize camera operation so that the B and A adjustment screen can be accessed simply by turning the < z > dial (

= 96 ).

Still Images Movies

Changing Image Color Tones (My Colors)

Change image color tones as desired, such as converting images to sepia or black and white.

z z m > button, choose [ ] in the menu, and choose the desired option

( = 24

).

z z displayed.

My Colors Off

Vivid

Neutral

Emphasizes contrast and color saturation, making images sharper.

Tones down contrast and color saturation for subdued images.

Sepia

B/W

Creates sepia tone images.

Creates black and white images.

Positive Film

Combines the effects of Vivid Blue, Vivid Green, and Vivid

Red to produce intense yet natural-looking colors resembling images on positive film.

Lighter Skin Tone Lightens skin tones.

Darker Skin Tone Darkens skin tones.

Vivid Blue

Vivid Green

Emphasizes blues in images. Makes the sky, ocean, and other blue subjects more vivid.

Emphasizes greens in images. Makes mountains, foliage, and other green subjects more vivid.

Vivid Red

Custom Color

Emphasizes reds in images. Makes red subjects more vivid.

Adjust contrast, sharpness, color saturation, and other qualities as desired (

= 76 ).

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

75

White balance ( = 74 ) cannot be set in [ ] or [ ] modes.

With [ ] and [ ] modes, colors other than people’s skin tone may change. These settings may not produce the expected results with some skin tones.

Still Images Movies

Custom Color

Choose the desired level of image contrast, sharpness, color saturation, red, green, blue, and skin tones in a range of 1 – 5.

1

Access the setting screen.

z z

Color Tones (My Colors)” (

=

75

) to choose [ ], and then press the < > button.

2

Configure the setting.

z z o >< p > buttons to choose an option, and then specify the value by pressing the < q

>< r

> buttons or turning the < 7 > dial.

z z darker skin tones), adjust the value to the right, and for weaker/lighter effects

(or lighter skin tones), adjust the value to the left.

z z setting.

Still Images

Continuous Shooting

Hold the shutter button all the way down to shoot continuously.

For details on the continuous shooting speed, see “Continuous Shooting

Speed” ( = 205 ).

1

Configure the setting.

z z m > button, choose [ ] in the menu, and choose the desired option

( = 24 ).

z z displayed.

2

Shoot.

z z to shoot continuously.

W

Mode

Continuous

Continuous

Shooting AF*

Description

Continuous shooting, with the focus and exposure determined when you press the shutter button halfway.

Continuous shooting and focusing.

[AF Frame] is set to [Center] and cannot be changed.

* In [ t

] mode ( = 53

), manual focus mode ( = 78 ), or when AF is locked

(

= 85 ), [

] is changed to [ ].

Cannot be used with the self-timer (

=

36 ) or [Blink Detection]

( = 48 ).

Shooting may stop momentarily or continuous shooting may slow down depending on shooting conditions, camera settings, and the zoom position.

As more shots are taken, shooting may slow down.

Shooting may slow down if the flash fires.

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

76

When using Face ID ( = 39

), the location in the image where the name is recorded will be determined in the first shot, and will be recorded in the same place for further shots.

Images Displayed during Playback

Each set of images shot continuously in [

G

], [

M

], [

B

], or [

D

] mode is managed as a single group, and only the first image in that group will be displayed. To indicate that the image is part of a group, [ in the upper left of the screen.

] is displayed

If you erase a grouped image ( = 114

), all images in the group are also erased. Be careful when erasing images.

Grouped images can be played back individually (

=

108 ) and ungrouped

( = 108 ).

Protecting (

= 111 ) a grouped image will protect all images in the group.

Grouped images can be viewed individually when played back using Image

Search (

=

106

) or Smart Shuffle (

=

110

). In this case, images are temporarily ungrouped.

These actions are not available for grouped images: magnifying ( = 109 ),

editing Face ID information (

= 108 ), tagging as favorites (

= 117 ), editing

(

=

118 –

121 ), printing (

=

176 ), setting up individual image printing

( = 181 ), or adding to a photobook (

= 182

). To do these things, either view

grouped images individually ( = 108 ) or cancel grouping ( = 108

) first.

Shooting Range and Focusing

Still Images

Shooting at Preset Focal Lengths

(Step Zoom)

Movies

You can shoot at preset focal lengths of 28, 35, 50, 85, 100 or 140 mm

(35mm film equivalent). This is convenient when you want to shoot at the angle of view of those focal lengths.

1

Assign [ ] to the <

z

> dial

(

=

96

).

2

Choose a focal length.

z z z > dial clockwise until it clicks to change the focal length from

28 mm to 35 mm. Keep turning the < z > dial to increase the focal length, which changes to 50, 85, 100, and 140 mm at each click.

Step zoom is not available when shooting movies even if you turn the < z > dial.

When using the digital zoom (

=

35 ), turning the <

z

> dial clockwise will not change the zoom factor. However, turning the < z > dial counterclockwise will set the focal length to 140 mm.

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

77

Still Images

Shooting Close-Ups (Macro)

To restrict the focus to subjects at close range, set the camera to [ e ]. For

details on the focusing range, see “Shooting Range” ( = 205 ).

z z q > button, choose [ e ] (either press the < q

>< r

> buttons or turn the

< 7 > dial), and then press the < m > button.

z z e ] is displayed.

If the flash fires, vignetting may occur.

Be careful to avoid damaging the lens.

To prevent camera shake, try mounting the camera on a tripod and shooting with the camera set to [ [

] ( = 37

).

Still Images

Shooting in Manual Focus Mode

Movies

When focusing is not possible in AF mode, use manual focus. You can specify the general focal position and then press the shutter button halfway to have the camera determine the optimal focal position near the position

you specified. For details on the focusing range, see “Shooting Range”

( = 205 ).

1

Choose [

f

].

z z o > button, and then press z [ the < m > button.

f ] and the MF indicator are displayed.

MF Indicator

2

Specify the general focal position.

z z bar (which shows the distance and focal position) and the magnified display area, press the < o

>< p

> buttons or turn the

< 7 > dial to specify the general focal position, and then press the < m > button.

z z

< r > button.

z z

( = 81 ).

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

78

3

Fine-tune the focus.

z z the camera fine-tune the focal position

(Safety MF).

z z q > button.

When you focus manually, the AF frame mode (

=

81

) is

[FlexiZone] and AF frame size ( = 81 ) is [Normal], and these

settings cannot be changed.

Focusing is possible when using the digital zoom ( = 35 ) or digital

tele-converter (

=

80

), or when using a TV as a display (

=

165

), but the magnified display will not appear.

To focus more accurately, try attaching the camera to a tripod to stabilize it.

To hide or enlarge the magnified display area, press the < n

> button and adjust the [MF-Point Zoom] settings on the [ 4

] tab as needed ( = 25 ).

To deactivate automatic focus fine-tuning when the shutter button is pressed halfway, press the < n > button and set [Safety MF] on the [ 4 ] tab to [Off]

( = 25

).

Still Images

Easily Identifying the Focus Area (MF Peaking)

Edges of subjects in focus are displayed in color to make manual focusing easier. You can adjust the colors and the sensitivity (level) of edge detection as needed.

1

Access the setting screen.

z z n > button, choose [MF

Peaking Settings] on the [ 4 ] tab, and then choose [On] (

=

25 ).

2

Configure the setting.

z z

then choose the desired option ( = 25

).

Colors displayed for MF peaking are not recorded in your shots.

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

79

Still Images

Focus Bracketing (Focus-BKT Mode)

Three consecutive images are captured each time you shoot, with the first one at the focal distance you set manually and the others at farther and nearer focal positions determined by presets. The distance from your specified focus can be set in three levels.

1

Choose [ ].

z z m

> button, choose

[ ] in the menu, and then choose [ ]

(

= 24 ).

2

Configure the setting.

z z the setting by pressing the < q >< r > buttons or turning the <

7

> dial.

Focus bracketing is only available in [ !

] mode ( = 86 ).

Continuous shooting ( = 76

) is not available in this mode.

You can also access the setting screen in step 2 by pressing the < n > button in step 2 of “Shooting in Manual Focus Mode” (

= 78

).

Three shots are taken, regardless of any quantity specified in [

$

] (

=

37

).

In [Blink Detection] mode ( = 48

), this function is only available for the final shot.

Still Images Movies

Digital Tele-Converter

The focal length of the lens can be increased by approximately 1.5x or 2.0x.

This can reduce camera shake because the shutter speed is faster than it would be if you zoomed (including using digital zoom) in to the same zoom factor.

z z n > button, choose

[Digital Zoom] on the [

4

] tab, and then choose the desired option (

= 25 ).

z z is displayed on the screen.

The digital tele-converter cannot be used with digital zoom

( = 35

) or AF-point zoom ( = 47 ).

The respective focal lengths when using [1.5x] and [2.0x] are 42.0 – 210.0 mm and 56.0 – 280.0 mm (35mm film equivalent).

The shutter speed may be equivalent when you move the zoom lever all the way toward < i > for maximum telephoto, and when you zoom in to enlarge the subject to the same size following step 2 in “Zooming In Closer on Subjects

(Digital Zoom)” (

= 35 ).

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

80

Still Images

Changing the AF Frame Mode

Movies

Change the AF (auto focus) frame mode to suit the shooting conditions as follows.

z z n > button, choose [AF

Frame] on the [

4

] tab, and then choose

the desired option ( = 25 ).

Still Images

FlexiZone/Center

One AF frame is displayed. Effective for reliable focusing.

With [FlexiZone], you can move and resize the AF frame (

= 81

).

A yellow AF frame is displayed with [ ] if the camera cannot focus when you press the shutter button halfway.

To compose shots so that subjects are positioned at the edge or in a corner, first aim the camera to capture the subject in an AF frame, and then hold the shutter button halfway down. As you continue to hold the shutter button halfway, recompose the shot as desired, and then press the shutter button all the way down (Focus Lock).

Still Images

Moving and Resizing AF Frames (FlexiZone)

When you want to change the position or size of the AF frame, set the AF

frame mode to [FlexiZone] ( = 81 ).

1

Prepare to move the AF frame.

z z turns orange.

2

Move and resize the AF frame.

z z 7 > dial to move the AF frame, or press the < o >< p >< q >< r > buttons to move it by a smaller amount.

z z position in the center, keep the < > button held down.

z z

< n > button. Press it again to restore it to the original size.

3

Finish the setup process.

z z

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

81

Still Images Movies

Face AiAF

Detects people’s faces, and then sets the focus, exposure (evaluative metering only), and white balance ([ ] only).

After you aim the camera at the subject, a white frame is displayed around the person’s face determined by the camera to be the main subject, and up to two gray frames are displayed around other detected faces.

When the camera detects movement, frames will follow moving subjects, within a certain range.

After you press the shutter button halfway, up to nine green frames are displayed around faces in focus.

If faces are not detected, or when only gray frames are displayed

(without a white frame), up to nine green frames are displayed in the areas in focus when you press the shutter button halfway.

If faces are not detected when Servo AF ( = 83 ) is set to [On], the

AF frame is displayed in the center of the screen when you press the shutter button halfway.

Examples of faces that cannot be detected:

- Subjects that are distant or extremely close

- Subjects that are dark or light

- Faces in profile, at an angle, or partly hidden

The camera may misinterpret non-human subjects as faces.

No AF frames are displayed if the camera cannot focus when you press the shutter button halfway.

Still Images

Choosing Subjects to Focus On (Tracking AF)

Shoot after choosing a subject to focus on as follows.

Movies

1

Choose [Tracking AF].

z z

Frame Mode” (

= 81 ) to choose

[Tracking AF].

z z screen.

2

Choose a subject to focus on.

z z desired subject, and then press the < > button.

z z beeps and [ ] is displayed. Even if the subject moves, the camera will continue to track the subject within a certain range.

z z displayed.

z z again.

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

82

3

Shoot.

z z changes to a blue [ ], which follows the subject as the camera continues to adjust the focus and exposure (Servo AF)

(

= 83

).

z z to shoot.

z z displayed and the camera continues to track the subject.

[Servo AF] ( = 83

) is set to [On] and cannot be changed.

Tracking may not be possible when subjects are too small or move too rapidly, or when subject color or brightness matches that of the background too closely.

[AF-Point Zoom] on the [ 4 ] tab is not available.

[ e

] is not available.

The camera can detect subjects even if you press the shutter button halfway without pressing the < > button. After your shot, [ ] is displayed in the center of the screen.

If [Face ID] is set to [On], names will not display when registered people are detected, but the names will be recorded in the still images (

=

39 ).

However, a name will display if the subject chosen to focus on is the same as a person detected with Face ID.

Still Images

Shooting with Servo AF

This mode helps avoid missing shots of subjects in motion, because the camera continues to focus on the subject and adjust the exposure as long as you press the shutter button halfway.

1

Configure the setting.

z z n > button, choose

[Servo AF] on the [ 4 ] tab, and then choose [On] (

=

25

).

2

Focus.

z z where the blue AF frame is displayed while you are pressing the shutter button halfway.

Focusing may not be possible in some shooting conditions.

In low-light conditions, Servo AF may not be activated (AF frames may not turn blue) when you press the shutter button halfway. In this case, the focus and exposure are set according to the specified AF frame mode.

If adequate exposure cannot be obtained, shutter speeds and aperture values are displayed in orange. Release the shutter button, and then press it halfway again.

AF lock shooting is not available.

[AF-Point Zoom] on the [

4

] tab is not available.

Not available when using the self-timer (

= 36

).

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

83

Still Images

Changing the Focus Setting

You can change default camera operation of constantly focusing on subjects it is aimed at, even when the shutter button is not pressed. Instead, you can limit camera focusing to the moment you press the shutter button halfway.

z z n > button, choose

[Continuous AF] on the [

4

] tab, and then

choose [Off] ( = 25 ).

On

Off

Helps avoid missing sudden photo opportunities, because the camera constantly focuses on subjects until you press the shutter button halfway.

Conserves battery power, because the camera does not focus constantly.

Still Images

Choosing a Person to Focus On (Face Select)

You can shoot after choosing a specific person’s face to focus on.

1

Prepare the camera for Face

Select.

z z

( = 82 ).

2

Enter Face Select mode.

z z press the < > button.

z z face frame [ ] is displayed around the face detected as the main subject.

z z

[ ] follows the subject within a certain range.

z z displayed.

3

Choose the face to focus on.

z z detected face, press the < > button.

z z to all detected faces, [Face Select : Off] is displayed, and the specified AF frame mode screen is displayed again.

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

84

4

Shoot.

z z z camera focuses, [ ] changes to [ ].

z to shoot.

When [Face ID] is set to [On], names of any registered people detected are not displayed when you have selected another, unregistered face to focus on.

However, their names will be recorded in the still images (

= 39 ).

Shooting with the AF Lock

Still Images Movies

The focus can be locked. After you lock the focus, the focal position will not change even when you release your finger from the shutter button.

1

Lock the focus.

z z press the < o > button.

z z f ] and the MF indicator are displayed.

z z button halfway down and press the < o > button again.

2

Compose the shot and shoot.

Flash

Still Images

Changing the Flash Mode

You can change the flash mode to match the shooting scene. For details on

the flash range, see “Flash Range” ( = 205 ).

1

Raise the flash.

z z > switch.

2

Configure the setting.

z z r > button, choose a flash mode (either press the < q >< r > buttons or turn the <

7

> dial), and then press the

< m > button.

z z displayed.

The setting screen cannot be accessed by pressing the < r

> button when the flash is lowered. Move the < > switch to raise the flash, then configure the setting.

[ ] Auto

Fires automatically in low-light conditions.

[

h

] On

Fires for each shot.

[

Z

] Slow Synchro

Fires to illuminate the main subject (such as people) while shooting at a slower shutter speed to illuminate backgrounds out of flash range.

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

85

In [ Z ] mode, mount the camera on a tripod or take other measures to keep it still and prevent camera shake. Additionally, you should set [IS Mode] to [Off] when using a tripod or other means to secure

the camera (

=

89 ).

In [ Z ] mode, even after the flash fires, ensure that the main subject does not move until the shutter sound is finished playing.

[

!

] Off

For shooting without the flash.

If a blinking [ ] icon is displayed when you press the shutter button halfway in low-light conditions, mount the camera on a tripod or take other measures to keep it still.

Still Images

Adjusting the Flash Exposure Compensation

Just as with regular exposure compensation (

= 68 ), you can adjust the

flash exposure from –2 to +2 stops, in 1/3-stop increments.

z z r > button and immediately turn the < z

> dial to choose the compensation level, and then press the < m > button.

z z displayed.

When there is a risk of overexposure, the camera automatically adjusts the shutter speed or aperture value during the flash shots to reduce washedout highlights and shoot at optimal exposure. However, you can deactivate automatic adjustment of the shutter speed and aperture value by accessing

MENU (

=

25

) and choosing [

4

] tab ► [Flash Control] ► [Safety FE] ►

[Off].

You can also configure the flash exposure compensation by choosing [ X ] in the FUNC. menu (

= 24

), or by accessing MENU (

= 25

) and choosing

[

4

] tab ► [Flash Control] ► [Flash Exp. Comp].

You can also access the [Built-in Flash Settings] MENU screen ( = 25 ) as

follows (except when an optional external flash is mounted).

- Press and hold the < r

> button for at least one second.

- When the flash is up, press the < r > button and immediately press the

< n

> button.

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

86

Still Images

Shooting with the FE Lock

Just as with the AE lock (

= 69

), you can lock the exposure for the flash shots.

1

Raise the flash and set it to [

h

]

(

=

85

).

2

Lock the flash exposure.

z z with the exposure locked, and then press the < > button.

z z

[ ] is displayed, the flash output level is retained.

3

Compose the shot and shoot.

z z no longer displayed.

FE: Flash Exposure

Changing the Flash Timing

Change the timing of the flash and shutter release as follows.

Still Images

1

Access the setting screen.

z z n > button, choose [Flash

Control] on the [ 4 ] tab, and then press the < m

> button ( = 25 ).

2

Configure the setting.

z z the desired option (

= 25

).

1st-curtain The flash fires immediately after the shutter opens.

2nd-curtain The flash fires immediately before the shutter closes.

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

87

Still Images

Shooting RAW Images

RAW images are “raw” (unprocessed) data, recorded with essentially no loss of image quality from the camera’s internal image processing. Use

Digital Photo Professional ( = 173

) to adjust RAW images as desired with minimal loss of image quality.

z z m > button, choose [ ] in the menu, and choose the desired option

(

=

24

).

Records JPEG images. JPEG images are processed in the camera for optimal image quality and compressed to reduce file size. However, the compression process is irreversible, and images cannot be restored to their original, unprocessed state. Image processing may also cause some loss of image quality.

Records RAW images. RAW images are “raw” (unprocessed) data, recorded with essentially no loss of image quality from the camera’s image processing. The data cannot be used in this state for viewing on a computer or printing. You must first use the software (Digital Photo Professional) to convert images to ordinary

JPEG or TIFF files. Images can be adjusted with minimal loss of image quality.

For details on resolution and the number of shots that will fit on a card, see

“Number of 4:3 Shots per Memory Card” ( = 204 ).

Records two images, both a RAW image and a JPEG image, for each shot.

The JPEG image can be viewed on a computer or printed without using the software.

When transferring RAW images (or RAW and JPEG images recorded together) to a computer, always use the dedicated software (

= 173 ).

Digital zoom (

=

35 ), date stamps (

=

38 ), and red-eye

reduction (

= 45

) are set to [Off] in [ ] and [ ] modes.

Additionally, noise reduction level (

=

71

), i-Contrast (

=

72 )

and My Colors (

= 75

) cannot be configured.

The file extension for JPEG images is .JPG, and the extension for

RAW images is .CR2.

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

88

Other Settings

Still Images

Changing the Compression Ratio

(Image Quality)

Choose from two compression ratios, [ ] (Super Fine) and [ ] (Fine), as follows. For guidelines on how many shots at each compression ratio can fit

on a memory card, see “Number of 4:3 Shots per Memory Card” ( = 204 ).

z z m > button, choose [ ] in the menu, and choose the desired option

(

=

24 ).

Still Images

Changing the IS Mode Settings

Movies

1

Access the setting screen.

z z n > button, choose [IS

Settings] on the [ 4 ] tab, and then press the < m

> button ( = 25 ).

2

Configure the setting.

z z desired option (

= 25

).

Continuous

Optimal image stabilization for the shooting conditions is automatically applied (Intelligent IS) (

= 34 ).

Shoot Only* Image stabilization is active only at the moment of shooting.

Off Deactivates image stabilization.

* The setting is changed to [Continuous] for movie recording.

If image stabilization cannot prevent camera shake, mount the camera on a tripod or take other measures to hold it still. In this case, set [IS Mode] to [Off].

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

89

Movies

Shooting Movies with Subjects at the Same Size Shown before Shooting

During movie recording, a smaller image display area is shown, with the subject enlarged, as a measure when correcting other distortion such as rotational camera shake. To shoot subjects at the same size shown before shooting, you can disable this image stabilization.

z z

Mode Settings” ( = 89 ) to access the

[IS Settings] screen.

z z

[2] ( = 34 ).

You can also set [IS Mode] to [Off], so that subjects are recorded at the same size shown before shooting.

Still Images Movies

Switching the Color of Shooting-Screen

Information

Information displayed on the shooting screen and menus can be changed to a color suitable for shooting under low-light conditions. Enabling this setting is useful in modes such as [ ] (

= 62

).

z z n > button, choose [Night

Display] on the [ 4 ] tab, and then choose

[On] (

=

25

).

The color is not adjusted in Playback mode.

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

90

5

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Take smarter, more sophisticated shots, and customize the camera for your shooting style

Instructions in this chapter apply to the camera as set to the respective mode.

Specific Shutter Speeds ([Tv] Mode) ..............

92

Specific Aperture Values ([Av] Mode) ............

93

Specific Shutter Speeds and Aperture Values

([M] Mode) ........................................................

93

Adjusting the Flash Output ....................................

94

Customization for Shooting Styles ................

95

Customizing Display Information ...........................

95

Assigning Functions to the Front Dial and Control

Dial ........................................................................

96

Convenient Control Using the < > or Movie

Button ....................................................................

97

Customizing the FUNC. Menu

(FUNC. Menu Layout) .....................................

98

Choosing Items to Include in the Menu .................

98

Saving Shooting Settings ......................................

99

Saving Commonly Used Shooting Menu Items

(My Menu) ...........................................................

100

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

91

Still Images

Specific Shutter Speeds ([Tv] Mode)

Set your preferred shutter speed before shooting as follows. The camera automatically adjusts the aperture value to suit your shutter speed.

For details on available shutter speeds, see “Shutter Speed” ( = 206 ).

1

Enter [

M

] mode.

z z M ].

2

Set the shutter speed.

z z z > dial to set the shutter speed.

15 – 1.3

1 – 1/4000

Shutter Speed (sec.) Available ISO Speed (

=

70 )

AUTO, 80 – 3200

AUTO, 80 – 12800

With shutter speeds of 1.3 seconds or slower, there will be a delay before you can shoot again, as images are processed to remove noise.

When shooting at low shutter speeds on a tripod, you should set [IS

Mode] to [Off] ( = 89 ).

Maximum shutter speed with the flash is 1/2000 second. If you specify a faster speed, the camera will automatically reset the speed to 1/2000 second before shooting.

Orange display of aperture values when you press the shutter button halfway indicates that the settings deviate from standard exposure. Adjust the shutter speed until the aperture value is displayed in white, or use safety shift (

=

93

).

Images shot at high ISO speeds may look grainy.

[ M ]: Time value

You can customize camera operation so that turning the <

7 shutter speed (

= 96

).

> dial changes the

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

92

Still Images

Specific Aperture Values ([Av] Mode)

Set your preferred aperture value before shooting as follows. The camera automatically adjusts the shutter speed to suit your aperture value.

For details on available aperture values, see “Aperture” ( = 206 ).

1

Enter [

B

] mode.

z z B ].

2

Set the aperture value.

z z z > dial to set the aperture value.

Orange display of shutter speeds when you press the shutter button halfway indicates that the settings deviate from standard exposure.

Adjust the aperture value until the shutter speed is displayed in white, or use safety shift (see below).

[

B

]: Aperture value (size of the opening made by the iris in the lens)

To avoid exposure problems in [ M ] and [ B ] modes, you can have the camera automatically adjust the shutter speed or aperture value, even when standard exposure cannot otherwise be obtained. Press the < n > button and set [Safety Shift] on the [

4

] tab to [On] (

=

25 ).

However, safety shift is disabled when the flash fires.

You can customize camera operation so that turning the < 7 > dial changes the

aperture value ( = 96

).

Still Images

Specific Shutter Speeds and Aperture

Values ([M] Mode)

Follow these steps before shooting to set your preferred shutter speed and aperture value to obtain the desired exposure.

For details on available shutter speeds and aperture values, see “Shutter

Speed” ( = 206 ) and “Aperture” ( = 206 ).

Aperture Value

Shutter Speed

1

Enter [

D

] mode.

z z D ].

2

Configure the setting.

z z z > dial to set the shutter speed, and turn the <

7

> dial to set the aperture value.

z z specified value is shown on the exposure level indicator for comparison to the standard exposure level.

z z orange when the difference from standard exposure exceeds 2 stops.

Standard

Exposure Level

Exposure

Level Indicator

Exposure Level

Mark

250 – 40

30 – 1.3

Shutter Speed (sec.)

1 – 1/4000

80

80 – 3200

Available ISO Speed (

=

70 )

80 – 12800

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

93

After you set the shutter speed or aperture value, the exposure level may change if you adjust the zoom or recompose the shot.

Screen brightness may change depending on your specified shutter speed or aperture value. However, screen brightness remains the same when the flash is up and the mode is set to [ h ].

To have both the shutter speed and aperture value automatically adjusted to obtain standard exposure, hold the shutter button halfway and press the < > button. Note that standard exposure may not be possible with some settings.

Images shot at high ISO speeds may look grainy.

[ D ]: Manual

Calculation of standard exposure is based on the specified metering method

( = 69

).

You can customize camera operation so that turning the <

7

> dial adjusts the shutter speed and turning the < z

> dial adjusts the aperture value ( = 96

).

Still Images

Adjusting the Flash Output

Choose from the three flash levels in [ D ] mode.

1

Enter [

D

] mode.

z z D ].

2

Configure the setting.

z z r

> button and immediately turn the < z > dial to choose the flash level, and then press the < m > button.

z z output level is displayed.

[ ]: low, [ ]: medium, [ ]: high

You can also set the flash level by choosing [ X ] in the FUNC. menu (

= 24 ),

or by accessing MENU (

=

25

) and choosing [

4

] tab ► [Flash Control] ►

[Flash Output].

You can set the flash level in [ M ] or [ B ] mode by accessing MENU

(

= 25 ) and choosing [

4 ] tab ► [Flash Control] ► [Flash Mode] ►

[Manual].

You can also access the [Built-in Flash Settings] MENU screen as follows

(except when an optional external flash is mounted).

- Press and hold the < r

> button for at least one second.

- When the flash is up, press the < r > button and immediately press the

< n

> button.

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

94

Customization for Shooting Styles

Still Images

Customizing Display Information

Movies

Set the number of custom displays ( = 23 ) and what information is

displayed in each display when the < p > button is pressed in shooting screen.

1

Access the setting screen.

z z n > button, choose

[Custom Display] on the [

4

] tab, and then press the < m

> button ( = 25 ).

2

Choose [LCD/Viewfinder].

z z o >< p >< q >< r > buttons or turn the < 7 > dial, and then press the

< m > button to configure custom displays

[ ], [ ] or [ ] which are displayed when the < p > button is pressed.

z z m

> button to add [ ] ([ ],

[ ], or [ ]) to custom displays so that they do not display when the < p > button is pressed.

z z

Viewfinder] custom display currently in use.

3

Configure the setting.

z z o >< p >< q >< r > buttons or turn the <

7

> dial to choose an item, and then press the < m > button. Items you choose for display are labeled with [ ].

z z be included in display.

Shooting Info Displays shooting information (

= 191

).

Grid Lines Displays a reference grid.

Electronic

Level

Histogram

Displays the electronic level (

Displays a histogram (

= 103

= 47

) in [ G

).

], [ M ], [ B ], and [ D ] modes.

Settings will not be saved if you press the shutter button halfway and return to the shooting screen from the custom display settings screen.

Grayed-out items can also be specified, but they may not be displayed in some shooting modes.

Grid lines are not recorded in your shots.

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

95

Still Images

Assigning Functions to the Front Dial and

Control Dial

Assign commonly used functions to the front dial and control dial, by shooting mode.

1

Access the setting screen.

z z n > button, choose [Set z7 Func.] on the [ 4 ] tab, and then press the < m

> button ( = 25 ).

2

Configure the setting.

z z q >< r > buttons to choose an item.

z z

< o >< p > buttons, choose an item (either press the < o

>< p

>< q

>< r

> buttons or turn the < 7 > dial), and then turn the

< z > dial to change the function.

Assignable Functions

Functions you can assign to the front dial and control dial vary depending on shooting mode. On the setting screen, you can assign aspect ratio

switching (

=

44 ), ISO speed (

=

70 ), dynamic range correction

(

= 73 ), shadow correction ( = 73

), white balance correction ( = 74

), step zooming (

=

77 ), or manual focusing (

=

78

) in modes indicated by in the following table.

Front Dial 1

Front Dial 2

Front Dial 3

Control Dial

Item

7 z

7 z

7 z

7 z

D

M

B

,

B

M

,

B , M

B , M

Shooting Mode

B M

B M

B

B

B

M

M

M

G

• [ B ]: aperture value (

= 93 ); [

M ]: shutter speed (

= 92 )

When multiple functions are assigned to the <

7

> dial, press the < > button to switch between them.

Selecting [Front Dial 3] enables you to adjust Program Shift ( = 69

), ISO

Speed (

= 70 ), and Manual Focus (

= 78

) on relevant setting screens by using < z

> dial.

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

96

Still Images Movies

Convenient Control Using the < > or Movie

Button

You can quickly and easily activate functions that you assign to the < > or movie button.

1

Access the setting screen.

z z n > button, choose [Set

Shortcut button] or [Set button] on the

[ 4 ] tab, and then press the < m > button

(

= 25

).

2

Configure the setting.

z z o >< p >< q >< r > buttons or turn the <

7

> dial to choose a function to assign, and then press the < m > button.

3

Use the assigned function as needed.

z z the button you assigned it to.

To restore default settings, choose [ ] in [Set Shortcut button] or [ ] in [Set

button].

Icons labeled with [ ] indicate that the function is not available in the current shooting mode or under current function conditions.

With [ ] or [ ], each press of the assigned button records white balance data

(

=

74 ), and the white balance setting changes to [ ] or [ ].

With [ % ], each press of the assigned button adjusts and locks the focus. [ % ] is then displayed.

With [ ], pressing the assigned button deactivates screen display. To restore the display, do any of the following.

- Press any button (other than the power button)

- Hold the camera in another orientation

- Raise or lower the flash

You can still record movies in [ ], [ E ] or [ ] mode even if you assign a function to the movie button.

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

97

Customizing the FUNC. Menu

(FUNC. Menu Layout)

The display of FUNC. menu items can be customized. Functions not shown on this menu will be available on the [ 4 ] tab of the menu screen.

Still Images

Choosing Items to Include in the Menu

Movies

1

Access the setting screen.

z z n > button, choose

[FUNC. Menu Layout] on the [

4

] tab, and then press the < m > button

(

= 25

).

2

Choose icons to include in the menu.

z z o >< p >< q >< r > buttons or turn the < 7 > dial and then press the

< m > button to choose icons to include in the FUNC. menu. Selected icons are marked with a [ ].

z z z included in display.

z the [ 4 ] tab of the menu screen.

3

Configure the setting.

z z n > button, choose [OK]

(either press the < q

>< r

> buttons or turn the < 7 > dial), and then press the < m > button.

The screen in step 2 can also be accessed by holding down the < m > button when the FUNC. menu is displayed.

Items that you remove from the FUNC. menu, add to My Menu ( = 100 ), and

then add to the FUNC. menu again will be removed from My Menu.

Rearranging Menu Items

1

Access the setting screen.

z z

Items to Include in the Menu” ( = 98 ),

press the < > button.

z z m > or < r > button to choose an icon to move. Press the < o >< p > buttons or turn the < 7 > dial to choose the new position, and then press the

< m > or < q > button.

2

Configure the setting.

z z n

> button, choose [OK]

(either press the < q >< r > buttons or turn the < 7 > dial), and then press the < m > button.

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

98

Still Images

Saving Shooting Settings

Save commonly used shooting modes and your configured function settings for reuse. To access saved settings later, simply turn the mode dial to [ ] or [ ]. Even settings that are usually cleared when you switch shooting modes or turn the camera off (such as self-timer settings) can be retained this way.

Settings that can be saved

Shooting modes ([ G ], [ M ], [ B ], and [ D ])

Items set in [ G ], [ M ], [ B ], or [ D ] modes (

= 68

94

)

Shooting menu settings

Zoom positions

Manual focus positions (

= 78

)

My Menu settings (

= 100

)

1

Enter a shooting mode with settings you want to save, and change the settings as desired.

2

Configure the setting.

z z n > button, choose [Save

Settings] on the [ 4 ] tab, and then press the < m > button.

3

Save the settings.

z z q

>< r

> buttons or turn the

< 7 > dial to choose the destination, and then press the < m > button.

To edit saved settings (except their shooting mode), choose [ ] or [ ], change the settings, and then repeat steps 2 – 3. These setting details are not applied in other shooting modes.

To clear information you have saved to [ ] or [ ] and restore default values, turn the mode dial to [ ] or [ ] and choose [Reset All] (

= 157

).

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

99

Still Images Movies

Saving Commonly Used Shooting Menu Items

(My Menu)

You can save up to five commonly used shooting menu items on the [ ] tab. By customizing the [ ] tab, you can access to these items quickly from a single screen.

1

Access the setting screen.

z z n > button, choose [My

Menu settings] on the [ ] tab, and then press the < m

> button ( = 25 ).

2

Configure the setting.

z z o >< p > buttons or turn the

<

7

> dial to choose [Select items], and then press the < m > button.

z z

(either press the < o >< p > buttons or turn the < 7 > dial), and then press the

< m > button.

z z z z m > button.

[ ] is no longer displayed.

z z n > button.

3

Rearrange menu items, as needed.

z z o >< p > buttons or turn the

< 7 > dial to choose [Sort], and then press the < m > button.

z z press the < o >< p > buttons or turn the

<

7

> dial), and then press the < m

> button.

z z o

>< p

> buttons or turn the

< 7 > dial to change the order, and then press the < m > button.

z z n > button.

Grayed-out items in step 2 can also be specified, but they may not be available in some shooting modes.

To make My Menu immediately accessible by pressing the < n > button in

Shooting mode, choose [Set default view] and press the < q

>< r

> buttons to choose [Yes].

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

100

6

Playback Mode

Have fun reviewing your shots, and browse or edit them in many ways

To prepare the camera for these operations, press the <

1

> button to enter Playback mode.

It may not be possible to play back or edit images that were renamed or already edited on a computer, or images from other cameras.

Viewing ............................................................

102

Switching Display Modes ....................................

103

Viewing Short Movies Created When Shooting

Still Images (Digest Movies) ................................

104

Checking People Detected in Face ID ................

105

Browsing and Filtering Images .....................

105

Navigating through Images in an Index...............

105

Finding Images Matching Specified Conditions ..

106

Using the Front Dial to Filter by [ ] or [ ] or

Jump by [ ] or [ ] ...........................................

107

Viewing Individual Images in a Group .................

108

Editing Face ID Information ..........................

108

Image Viewing Options ..................................

109

Magnifying Images ..............................................

109

Viewing Slideshows ............................................

110

Auto Playback of Related Images

(Smart Shuffle) ....................................................

110

Protecting Images ...........................................

111

Choosing a Selection Method ..............................

111

Choosing Images Individually .............................

112

Selecting a Range ...............................................

112

Specifying All Images at Once ............................

113

Erasing Images ...............................................

114

Erasing Multiple Images at Once ........................

114

Rotating Images .............................................

116

Deactivating Auto Rotation ..................................

116

Tagging Images as Favorites ........................

117

Convenient Control Using the < >

Button ............................................................

118

Editing Still Images ........................................

118

Resizing Images ..................................................

118

Cropping ..............................................................

119

Changing Image Color Tones (My Colors) ..........

120

Correcting Image Brightness (i-Contrast) ............

120

Correcting Red-Eye .............................................

121

Editing Movies ................................................

122

Reducing File Sizes ............................................

123

Editing Digest Movies ..........................................

123

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

101

Still Images Movies

Viewing

After shooting images or movies, you can view them on the screen as follows.

1

Enter Playback mode.

z z 1

> button.

z z

2

Browse through your images.

z z the < q > button or turn the < 7 > dial counterclockwise. To view the next image, press the < r > button or turn the

< 7 > dial clockwise.

z z q >< r > buttons to browse through images quickly.

z z

< 7 > dial rapidly. In this mode, turn the

< 7 > dial to browse through images.

z z the < m > button.

z z date, press the < o >< p > buttons in

Scroll Display mode.

Volume Indicator z z play movies, go to step 3.

] icon. To

3

Play movies.

z z m > button to access the movie control panel, choose [ ] (either press the < q >< r > buttons or turn the < 7 > dial), and then press the < m > button again.

4

Adjust the volume.

z z o

>< p

> buttons to adjust the z volume.

To adjust the volume when the volume indicator is no longer displayed, press the

< o >< p > buttons.

5

Pause playback.

z z z

< m

> button.

After the movie is finished, [ displayed.

] is

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

102

To switch to Shooting mode from Playback mode, press the shutter button halfway.

To deactivate Scroll Display, press the < n > button, choose [Scroll

Display] on the [ 1 ] tab, and then choose [Off].

If you prefer to have the most recent shot displayed when you enter Playback mode, press the < n

> button, and on the [

1

] tab, choose [Resume] and then [Last shot].

To change the transition shown between images, press the < n > button, choose [Transition Effect] on the [ 1 ] tab, and then choose the desired effect.

Still Images Movies

Switching Display Modes

Press the < p > button to view other information on the screen, or to hide the information. For details on the information displayed, see “Playback

(Detailed Information Display)” (

= 192

).

No Information

Display

Simple

Information

Display

Detailed

Information

Display

RGB Histogram,

GPS Information

Display

Still Images Movies

Overexposure Warning (for Image Highlights)

Washed-out highlights in the image flash on the screen in detailed information display (

= 103 ).

Histogram

Dark Bright

High

Low

Still Images Movies z z

( = 103 ) is a histogram showing the

distribution of brightness in the image.

The horizontal axis represents the degree of brightness, and the vertical axis, how much of the image is at each level of brightness. Viewing the histogram is a way to check exposure.

z z

while shooting (

=

95

, 191

).

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

103

Still Images

RGB Histogram, GPS Information Display

Movies z z distribution of shades of red, green, and blue in an image. The horizontal axis represents R, G, or B brightness, and the vertical axis, how much of the image is at that level of brightness. Viewing this histogram enables you to check image color characteristics.

z z camera via Wi-Fi, you can geotag images on the camera, adding information such as latitude, longitude, and elevation

(

= 146

). You can review this information in the GPS information display.

z z

(shooting date and time) are listed from top to bottom.

[---] is shown instead of numerical values for items not available on your smartphone or items not recorded correctly.

UTC: Coordinated Universal Time, essentially the same as Greenwich Mean

Time

GPS information display is not available for images that lack this information.

Movies

Viewing Short Movies Created When Shooting

Still Images (Digest Movies)

View digest movies recorded automatically in [ ] mode ( = 31 ) on a day

of still image shooting as follows.

1

Choose an image.

z z and press the < m > button.

]

2

Play the movie.

z z q

>< r

> buttons or turn the z

< 7 > dial to choose [OK].

The movie recorded automatically on the day of still image shooting is played back, from the beginning.

After a moment, [ ] will no longer be displayed when you are using the camera with information display deactivated (

= 103 ).

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

104

Viewing by Date

Digest movies can be viewed by date.

1

Choose a movie.

z z n > button, choose [List/

Play Digest Movies] on the [ 1 ] tab, and

then choose a date (

=

25

).

2

Play the movie.

z z m > button to start playback.

Still Images

Checking People Detected in Face ID

If you switch the camera to simple information display mode (

=

103

), the

names of up to five detected people registered in Face ID ( = 39

) will be displayed.

z z p > button several times until simple information display is activated, and then press the < q >< r > buttons or turn the <

7

> dial to choose an image.

z z people.

If you do not want names to display on images shot using Face ID, press the

< n > button, choose [Face ID Info] on the [ 1 ] tab, and then set [Name

Display] to [Off].

Browsing and Filtering Images

Still Images

Navigating through Images in an Index

Movies

By displaying multiple images in an index, you can quickly find the images you are looking for.

1

Display images in an index.

z z g > to display images in an index. Moving the lever again will increase the number of images shown.

z z lever toward < k

>. Fewer images are shown each time you move the lever.

2

Choose an image.

z z 7 > dial to scroll through the images.

z z o >< p >< q >< r > buttons to choose an image.

z z selected image.

z z m > button to view the selected image in single-image display.

To deactivate the 3D display effect (shown if you hold down the < o

>< p

> buttons or turn the < 7 > dial rapidly), press the < n > button, and on the

[ 1 ] tab, set [Index Effect] to [Off].

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

105

Still Images

Finding Images Matching Specified

Conditions

Movies

Find desired images quickly on a memory card full of images by filtering image display according to your specified conditions. You can also protect

(

= 111 ) or delete (

= 114

) these images all at once.

Favorites

Shot Date

People

Still image/Movie

Name

Displays images tagged as favorites ( = 117 ).

Displays the images shot on a specific date.

Displays images with detected faces.

Displays still images, movies, or movies shot in

[ ] mode (

= 31 ).

Displays images of a registered person (

= 39 ).

Still Images Movies

Filtering Display by [ ], [ ], [ ], or [ ]

1

Choose the first condition for

image display or navigation.

z z button, and then press the < o

>< p

> buttons to choose a display filter.

z z view only images matching this condition by pressing the < q >< r > buttons or turning the < 7 > dial. To perform an action for all of these images together, press the < m > button and go to step 3.

2

Choose the second condition and check the images found.

z z q

>< r

> buttons to choose another condition. Once you turn the

< 7 > dial, you can view the images narrowed down by your conditions.

z z n > button.

z z the < m > button and go to step 3.

3

View the filtered images.

z z displayed in yellow frames. To view only these images, press the < q >< r > buttons, or turn the < 7 > dial.

z z > button.

When the camera has found no corresponding images for some conditions, those conditions will not be available.

To show or hide information, press the < p > button in step 3.

Options for viewing the images found (in step 3) include “Navigating through

Images in an Index” (

=

105 ), “Magnifying Images” (

=

109

), and “Viewing

Slideshows” ( = 110 ). You can protect, erase, or print all images found or add

them to a photobook by choosing [Select All Images in Search] in “Protecting

Images” ( = 111 ), “Erasing Multiple Images at Once” (

= 114 ), “Adding

Images to the Print List (DPOF)” (

=

180 ), or “Adding Images to a Photobook”

( = 182 ).

If you edit images and save them as new images ( = 118 –

121 ), a message

is displayed, and the images that were found are no longer shown.

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

106

Still Images

Filtering Display by [ ]

1

Choose [ ].

z z

[ ], [ ], [ ], or [ ]” (

=

106 ), choose

[ ] and press the < m > button.

2

Choose a person.

z z o >< p >< q >< r > buttons to choose a person, and then press the

< m > button.

3

View the filtered images.

z z

[ ], [ ], or [ ]” (

= 106 ) to view the

images.

[ ] is not available unless people are registered ( = 39 ).

Using the Front Dial to Filter by [ ] or [ ] or

Jump by [ ] or [ ]

Jump to Favorites

Jump Shot Date

Jump 10 Images

Jump 100 Images

Displays images tagged as favorites ( = 117 ).

Jumps to the first image in each group of images that were shot on the same date.

Jumps by 10 images at a time.

Jumps by 100 images at a time.

1

Choose a condition.

z z single-image display by turning the < z > dial and then pressing the < o

>< p

> buttons.

2

View images matching your specified condition, or jump by the specified amount.

z z z > dial to view only images matching the condition or jump by the specified number of images forward or back.

Turning the < z

> dial when browsing images in index display will jump to the previous or next image according to the jump method chosen in single-image display. However, if you have chosen [ ] or [ ], the jump method will be switched to [ ].

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

107

Still Images

Viewing Individual Images in a Group

Grouped images (either from continuous shooting (

= 76

) in [ G ], [ M ],

[ B ], or [ D

] mode ( = 67 ,

92 , or

93 ) or individual still images saved

as source data in [ ] mode (

=

63 )) are generally displayed together,

but they can also be viewed individually.

1

Choose a grouped image.

z z q >< r > buttons or turn the

< 7 > dial to choose an image labeled with [ ], and then press the < m > button.

2

View images in the group individually.

z z q

>< r

> buttons or turning the < 7 > dial will display only images in the group.

z z

[Display all images]. Press < m > to cancel group playback.

During group playback (step 2), you can browse through images quickly

“Navigating through Images in an Index” ( = 105 ) and magnify them

“Magnifying Images” ( = 109 ). By choosing [All Images in Group] for

“Protecting Images” ( = 111 ), “Erasing Multiple Images at Once” (

= 114 ),

“Adding Images to the Print List (DPOF)” ( = 180 ), or “Adding Images to a

Photobook” ( = 182 ), all images in the group can be manipulated at once.

To ungroup images so that they are displayed only as single still images, press the < n > button, choose [Group Images] on the [ 1 ] tab, and then

choose [Off] ( = 25

). However, grouped images cannot be ungrouped during individual playback.

Editing Face ID Information

If you notice that a name is incorrect during playback, you can change it or erase it.

However, you cannot add names for people who are not detected by Face

ID (names are not displayed), and for people whose names have been erased.

Changing Names

1

Access the setting screen.

z z n > button and choose

[Face ID Info] on the [ 1

] tab ( = 25 ).

z z o >< p > buttons or turn the

< 7 > dial to choose [Edit ID Info], and then press the < m > button.

2

Choose an image.

z z

People Detected in Face ID” (

=

105 ),

choose an image and press the < m > button.

z z selected face. When multiple names are displayed in an image, press the < q >< r > buttons or turn the < 7 > dial to choose the name to change, and then press the

< m > button.

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

108

Erasing Names

3

Choose the editing option.

z z o

>< p

>< q

>< r

> buttons or turn the < 7 > dial to choose [Overwrite], and then press the < m > button.

4

Choose the name of the person to overwrite with.

z z

Face Information” (

= 43

) to choose the name of the person you want to overwrite with.

z z

(

=

109

), choose [Erase] and press the

< m > button.

z z

< q >< r > buttons or turn the < 7 > dial to choose [OK], and then press the < m > button.

Image Viewing Options

Still Images

Magnifying Images

Approximate Position of

Displayed Area

1

Magnify an image.

z z k > will zoom in and magnify the image. You can magnify images up to about 10x by continuing to hold the zoom lever.

z z toward < g

>. You can return to singleimage display by continuing to hold it.

2

Move the display position and switch images as needed.

z z z

< o

>< p

>< q

>< r

> buttons.

To switch to other images while zoomed, turn the <

7

> dial.

You can return to single-image display from magnified display by pressing the

< n

> button.

You can check the focus when [ ] is displayed by pressing the < m > button to enlarge the AF frame position (Focus Check). Press the < m > button repeatedly to enlarge any other AF frames displayed.

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

109

Still Images

Viewing Slideshows

Automatically play back images from a memory card as follows.

Movies

1

Access the setting screen.

z z n > button, and then choose [Slideshow] on the [ 1 ] tab

(

= 25

).

2

Configure the setting.

z z then choose the desired option (

= 25

).

3

Start automatic playback.

z z o

>< p

> buttons or turn the

< 7 > dial to choose [Start], and then press the < m > button.

z z image] is displayed for a few seconds.

z z n > button to stop the slideshow.

The camera’s power-saving functions (

=

21 ) are deactivated

during slideshows.

To pause or resume slideshows, press the < m > button.

You can switch to other images during playback by pressing the < q >< r > buttons or turning the <

7

> dial. For fast-forward or fast-rewind, hold the

< q >< r > buttons down.

Still Images

Auto Playback of Related Images

(Smart Shuffle)

Based on the current image, the camera offers four images that you may wish to view. After you choose to view one of those images, the camera offers four more images. This is an enjoyable way to play back images in an unexpected order. Try this feature after you have taken many shots, in many kinds of scenes.

1

Choose Smart Shuffle.

z z n > button, choose

[Smart Shuffle] on the [ 1 ] tab, and then press the < m > button (

= 25

).

z z

2

Choose an image.

z z o >< p >< q >< r > buttons to z choose the image you want to view next.

z center, surrounded by the next four candidate images.

z z image, press the < m > button. To restore the original display, press the < m > button again.

z z n > button to restore single-image display.

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

110

Only still images shot with this camera are played back using Smart

Shuffle.

Smart Shuffle is not available in the following cases:

- There are less than 50 shots taken with this camera

- An unsupported image is currently displayed

-

Images are shown in filtered display ( = 106 )

- During group playback (

= 108 )

Still Images Movies

Protecting Images

Protect important images to prevent accidental erasure by the camera

(

= 114 ).

Choosing a Selection Method

1

Access the setting screen.

z z n

> button and choose

[Protect] on the [ 1

] tab ( = 25

).

2

Choose a selection method.

z z

desired ( = 25 ).

z z

< n > button.

Protected images on a memory card will be erased if you format the

card (

=

153

, 154

).

Protected images cannot be erased using the camera’s erasure function. To erase them this way, first cancel protection.

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

111

Choosing Images Individually

1

Choose [Select].

z z

Method” (

= 111

), choose [Select] and press the < m > button.

2

Choose an image.

z z q >< r > buttons or turn the

<

7

> dial to choose an image, and then press the < m > button. [ ] is displayed.

z z m

> z button again. [ ] is no longer displayed.

Repeat this process to specify other images.

3

Protect the image.

z z n > button. A confirmation message is displayed.

z z q >< r > buttons or turn the

< 7 > dial to choose [OK], and then press the < m > button.

Images will not be protected if you switch to Shooting mode or turn the camera off before finishing the setup process in step 3.

Selecting a Range

1

Choose [Select Range].

z z

Method” ( = 111 ), choose [Select

Range] and press the < m > button.

2

Choose a starting image.

z z m > button.

z z q >< r > buttons or turn the

<

7

> dial to choose an image, and then press the < m > button.

3

Choose an ending image.

z z r > button to choose [Last image], and then press the < m > button.

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

112

z z q >< r > buttons or turn the

< 7 > dial to choose an image, and then press the < m

> button.

z z selected as the last image.

4

Protect the images.

z z p > button to choose

[Protect], and then press the < m > button.

You can also choose the first or last image by turning the < 7 > dial when the top screen in steps 2 and 3 is displayed.

Specifying All Images at Once

1

Choose [Select All Images].

z z

Method” ( = 111 ), choose [Select All

Images] and press the < m > button.

2

Protect the images.

z z o >< p > buttons or turn the

< 7 > dial to choose [Protect], and then press the < m

> button.

To cancel protection for groups of images, choose [Unlock] in step 4 of

“Selecting a Range” or in step 2 of “Specifying All Images at Once”.

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

113

Still Images Movies

Erasing Images

You can choose and erase unneeded images one by one. Be careful when erasing images, because they cannot be recovered. However, protected images (

= 111

) cannot be erased.

1

Choose an image to erase.

z z q >< r > buttons or turn the

<

7

> dial to choose an image.

2

Erase the image.

z z a

> button.

z z

< q

>< r

> buttons or turn the <

7

> dial to choose [Erase], and then press the < m > button.

z z z z q

>< r

> buttons or turn the < 7 > dial to choose

[Cancel], and then press the < m > button.

Pressing the < a > button while [ ] images are displayed will give you the option of choosing [Erase ], [Erase JPEG], or [Erase +JPEG] for deletion.

Erasing Multiple Images at Once

You can choose multiple images to erase at once. Be careful when erasing images, because they cannot be recovered. However, protected images

(

=

111

) cannot be erased.

Choosing a Selection Method

1

Access the setting screen.

z z n > button, and then choose [Erase] on the [

1

] tab (

=

25

).

2

Choose a selection method.

z z z

desired ( = 25 ).

z

< n > button.

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

114

1

Choose [Select].

z z

Method” (

= 114 ), choose [Select] and

press the < m > button.

2

Choose an image.

z z step 2 in “Choosing Images Individually”

(

= 112 ), [ ] is displayed.

z z m

> z button again. [ ] is no longer displayed.

z images.

3

Erase the image.

z z n > button. A confirmation message is displayed.

z z q >< r > buttons or turn the

< 7 > dial to choose [OK], and then press the < m > button.

Selecting a Range

1

Choose [Select Range].

z z

Method” ( = 114

), choose [Select

Range] and press the < m > button.

2

Choose images.

z z

( = 112

) to specify images.

3

Erase the images.

z z p > button to choose [Erase], and then press the < m > button.

1

Choose [Select All Images].

z z

Method” (

=

114

), choose [Select All

Images] and press the < m > button.

2

Erase the images.

z z q >< r > buttons or turn the

< 7 > dial to choose [OK], and then press the < m > button.

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

115

Still Images

Rotating Images

Change the orientation of images and save them as follows.

Movies

1

Choose [Rotate].

z z n > button and choose

[Rotate] on the [ 1 ] tab (

= 25

).

2

Rotate the image.

z z q >< r > buttons or turn the z

<

7

> dial to choose an image.

z press the < m

> button.

z z

< n

> button.

Movies with an image quality of [ be rotated.

], [ ], or [ ] cannot

Rotation is not possible when [Auto Rotate] is set to [Off] ( = 116

).

Deactivating Auto Rotation

Follow these steps to deactivate automatic image rotation, which rotates images based on the current camera orientation.

z z n > button, choose [Auto

Rotate] on the [ 1 ] tab, and then choose

[Off] (

=

25 ).

Images cannot be rotated (

= 116 ) when you set [Auto Rotate] to

[Off]. Additionally, images already rotated will be displayed in the original orientation.

In Smart Shuffle ( = 110

) mode, even if [Auto Rotate] is set to

[Off], images shot vertically will be displayed vertically, and rotated images will be displayed in the rotated orientation.

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

116

Still Images

Tagging Images as Favorites

Movies

You can organize images by tagging them as favorites. By choosing a category in filtered playback, you can restrict the following operations to all of those images.

Viewing ( = 102

), Viewing Slideshows ( = 110 ), Protecting Images

(

=

111 ), Erasing Images (

=

114

), Adding Images to the Print List

(DPOF) ( = 180

), Adding Images to a Photobook ( = 182 )

1

Choose [Favorites].

z z n > button and choose

[Favorites] on the [ 1 ] tab (

= 25

).

2

Choose an image.

z z q >< r > buttons or turn the

<

7

> dial to choose an image, and then press the < m > button. [ ] is displayed.

z z m

> z button again. [ ] is no longer displayed.

Repeat this process to choose additional images.

3

Finish the setup process.

z z n

> button. A z confirmation message is displayed.

Press the < q

>< r

> buttons or turn the

< 7 > dial to choose [OK], and then press the < m > button.

Images will not be tagged as favorites if you switch to Shooting mode or turn the camera off before finishing the setup process in step 3.

Favorite images will have a three-star rating ( ) when transferred to computers running Windows 8, Windows 7, or Windows Vista. (Does not apply to movies or RAW images.)

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

117

Still Images Movies

Convenient Control Using the < >

Button

You can quickly and easily activate functions that you assign to the < > button.

1

Choose [Set Shortcut button].

z z n

> button, and then choose [Set Shortcut button] on the [ 1 ]

tab ( = 25 ).

2

Configure the setting.

z z q >< r > buttons or turn the

<

7

> dial to choose a function to assign, and then press the < m > button.

3

Use the assigned function as needed.

z z > button to activate the assigned function.

To restore default settings, choose [ ].

When [

2

] is assigned and you press the < > button while the camera is not connected to the printer, the image is designated for printing and will be printed once the printer is connected.

Editing Still Images

Image editing (

= 118 –

121

) is only available when the memory card has sufficient free space.

Still Images

Resizing Images

Save a copy of images at a lower resolution.

1

Choose [Resize].

z z n > button and choose

[Resize] on the [

1

] tab (

=

25 ).

2

Choose an image.

z z q

>< r

> buttons or turn the

< 7 > dial to choose an image, and then press the < m > button.

3

Choose an image size.

z z q >< r > buttons or turn the

< 7 > dial to choose the size, and then press the < m

> button.

z z

4

Save the new image.

z z q

>< r

> buttons or turn the

< 7 > dial to choose [OK], and then press the < m > button.

z z

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

118

5

Review the new image.

z z n

> button. [Display new z image?] is displayed.

Press the < q

>< r

> buttons or turn the

< 7 > dial to choose [Yes], and then press the < m > button.

z z

Editing is not possible for images shot at a resolution of [ ] (

= 45

) or saved as [ ] in step 3.

RAW images cannot be edited.

Images cannot be resized to a higher resolution.

Still Images

Cropping

You can specify a portion of an image to save as a separate image file.

1

Choose [Cropping].

z z n > button, and then choose [Cropping] on the [ 1 ] tab

(

=

25

).

2

Choose an image.

z z q >< r > buttons or turn the

< 7 > dial to choose an image, and then press the < m > button.

Cropping Area

Preview of Image After

Cropping

Resolution After Cropping

3

Adjust the cropping area.

z z z the image to be cropped.

z left, and a preview of the image as cropped is shown in the lower right.

z z lever.

z z

< o >< p >< q >< r > buttons.

z z the < m > button.

z z enclosed in gray frames in the upper-left image. To crop the image based on this frame, turn the <

7

> dial to switch to the other frame.

z z n

> button.

4

Save as a new image and review.

z z

( = 118

119

).

Editing is not possible for images shot at a resolution of [ ] ( = 45 )

or resized to [ ] (

= 118

).

RAW images cannot be edited.

Images supported for cropping will have the same aspect ratio after cropping.

Cropped images will have a lower resolution than uncropped images.

If you crop still images shot using Face ID (

= 39 ), only the names of the

people left in the cropped image will remain.

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

119

Still Images

Changing Image Color Tones (My Colors)

You can adjust image colors and then save the edited image as a separate

file. For details on each option, see “Changing Image Color Tones (My

Colors)” ( = 75 ).

1

Choose [My Colors].

z z n > button, and then choose [My Colors] on the [ 1 ] tab

(

= 25

).

2

Choose an image.

z z q >< r > buttons or turn the

<

7

> dial to choose an image, and then press the < m > button.

3

Choose an option.

z z q >< r > buttons or turn the

< 7 > dial to choose an option, and then press the < m > button.

4

Save as a new image and review.

z z

(

= 118 –

119

).

Image quality of pictures you repeatedly edit this way will be a little lower each time, and you may not be able to obtain the desired color.

Colors of RAW images cannot be edited.

The color of images edited using this function may vary slightly from the color of images shot using My Colors (

= 75 ).

Still Images

Correcting Image Brightness (i-Contrast)

Excessively dark image areas (such as faces or backgrounds) can be detected and automatically adjusted to the optimal brightness. Insufficient overall image contrast is also automatically corrected, to make subjects stand out better. Choose from four correction levels, and then save the image as a separate file.

1

Choose [i-Contrast].

z z n > button, and then choose [i-Contrast] on the [ 1 ] tab

( = 25 ).

2

Choose an image.

z z q >< r > buttons or turn the

<

7

> dial to choose an image, and then press the < m > button.

3

Choose an option.

z z q >< r > buttons or turn the

< 7 > dial to choose an option, and then press the < m > button.

4

Save as a new image and review.

z z

( = 118

119

).

For some images, correction may be inaccurate or may cause images to appear grainy.

Images may look grainy after repeated editing using this function.

RAW images cannot be edited this way.

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

120

If [Auto] does not produce the expected results, try correcting images using

[Low], [Medium], or [High].

Still Images

Correcting Red-Eye

Automatically corrects images affected by red-eye. You can save the corrected image as a separate file.

1

Choose [Red-Eye Correction].

z z n > button, and then choose [Red-Eye Correction] on the [

1

]

tab ( = 25 ).

2

Choose an image.

z z q >< r > buttons or turn the

< 7 > dial to choose an image.

3

Correct the image.

z z m

> button.

z z corrected, and frames are displayed around corrected image areas.

z z

Follow the steps in “Magnifying Images”

( = 109 ).

4

Save as a new image and review.

z z o >< p >< q >< r > buttons or turn the < 7 > dial to choose [New File], and then press the < m > button.

z z z z

( = 119

).

Some images may not be corrected accurately.

To overwrite the original image with the corrected image, choose

[Overwrite] in step 4. In this case, the original image will be erased.

Protected images cannot be overwritten.

RAW images cannot be edited this way.

Red-eye correction can be applied to JPEG images shot in [ ], but the original image cannot be overwritten.

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

121

Movies

Editing Movies

You can cut movies to remove unneeded portions at the beginning or end.

1

Choose [

*

].

z z

(

= 102

), choose [ * ] and press the

< m

> button.

z z are now displayed.

Movie Editing Panel

Movie Editing Bar

2

Specify portions to cut.

z z o >< p > buttons to choose z

[ ] or [ ].

z

(identified by [ ] on the screen), press the < q >< r > buttons or turn the < 7 > dial to move [ ]. Cut the beginning of the movie (from [ ]) by choosing [ ], and cut the end of the movie by choosing

[ ].

z z

[ ] mark, in [ ] the portion before the nearest [ ] mark on the left will be cut, while in [ ] the portion after the nearest

[ ] mark on the right will be cut.

3

Review the edited movie.

z z o >< p > buttons to choose

[ ], and then press the < m

> button.

The edited movie is now played.

z z z z o >< p > buttons to choose [ ]. Press the < m

> button, choose [OK] (either press the

< q >< r > buttons or turn the < 7 > dial), and then press the < m > button again.

4

Save the edited movie.

z z o >< p > buttons to choose z

[ ], and then press the < m

> button.

z turn the <

7

> dial to choose [New File], and then press the < m > button.

z z o >< p >< q >< r > buttons or z z press the < m > button.

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

122

To overwrite the original movie with the cut one, choose [Overwrite] in step 4. In this case, the original movie will be erased.

If the memory card lacks sufficient space, only [Overwrite] will be available.

Movies may not be saved if the battery pack runs out while saving is in progress.

When editing movies, you should use a fully charged battery pack or

an AC adapter kit (sold separately,

=

160

).

Reducing File Sizes

Movie file sizes can be reduced by compressing movies as follows.

z z

Movies”, choose [ ]. Choose [New File], and then press the < m > button.

z z press the < m > button.

Compressed movies are saved in [

[

] format.

] movies cannot be compressed.

Edited movies cannot be saved in compressed format when you choose

[Overwrite].

However, you can compress and save edited movies as new files by choosing

[Compress & Sav.].

Movies

Editing Digest Movies

Individual chapters (clips) ( = 31 ) recorded in [ ] mode can be erased, as

needed. Be careful when erasing clips, because they cannot be recovered.

1

Select the clip to erase.

z z

Movies Created When Shooting Still

Images (Digest Movies)” (

=

104 ) to

play a movie created in [ ] mode, and then press the < m > button to access the movie control panel.

z z q >< r > buttons or turn the

< 7 > dial to choose [ ] or [ ], and then press the < m

> button.

2

Choose [ ].

z z q

>< r

> buttons or turn the

< 7 > dial to choose [ ], and then press the < m > button.

z z

3

Confirm erasure.

z z q >< r > buttons or turn the

< 7 > dial to choose [OK], and then press the < m > button.

z z overwritten.

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

[ ] is not displayed if you select a clip when the camera is connected to a printer.

123

7

Wi-Fi Functions

Send images wirelessly from the camera to a variety of compatible devices, and use the camera with Web services

What You Can Do with Wi-Fi .........................

125

Preparing to Share Images via Wi-Fi ............

126

Uploading Images to Web Services ....................

126

Sending Images to a Smartphone .......................

126

Sending Images to Another Camera ...................

126

Sending Images to a Computer ..........................

127

Printing Images Wirelessly ..................................

127

Registering Web Services .............................

127

Registering CANON iMAGE GATEWAY .............

128

Registering Other Web Services .........................

130

Installing CameraWindow on a

Smartphone ...................................................

130

Preparing to Register a Computer ................

131

Checking Your Computer Environment ...............

131

Installing the Software .........................................

131

Configuring the Computer for a Wi-Fi Connection

(Windows Only) ...................................................

133

Accessing the Wi-Fi Menu .............................

133

Initial Connection via Wi-Fi ..................................

133

After the Initial Wi-Fi Connection .........................

134

Connecting via an Access Point ...................

134

Confirming Access Point Compatibility ................

134

Connecting to WPS-Compatible Access Points ..

135

Connecting to Access Points in the List ..............

138

Connecting without an Access Point ...........

139

Previous Access Points .......................................

140

Connecting to Another Camera ....................

141

Sending Images ..............................................

142

Sending Images Individually ...............................

142

Sending Multiple Images .....................................

143

Adding Comments ...............................................

143

Saving Images to a Computer .......................

144

Sending Images Automatically

(Image Sync) .................................................

145

Initial Preparations ..............................................

145

Sending Images ..................................................

146

Geotagging Images on the Camera ..............

146

Editing or Erasing Wi-Fi Settings .................

147

Editing Connection Information ...........................

147

Returning the Wi-Fi Settings to Default ...............

148

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

124

What You Can Do with Wi-Fi

This camera is an approved Wi-Fi

®

* product. You can wirelessly connect to and send images to the following devices and services.

Note that, in this chapter, wireless LAN functions other than Wi-Fi may be referred to as Wi-Fi.

* Wi-Fi is a brand name that indicates interoperability certification of wireless

LAN devices.

Connecting to Web Services

Images can be sent to social network services and other Web services via CANON iMAGE GATEWAY*. Unsent images on the camera can also be sent automatically to a computer or

Web service via CANON iMAGE GATEWAY.

* CANON iMAGE GATEWAY is an online photo service available to those who have purchased this product.

Connecting to a Smartphone

Send images to smartphones and tablet computers that have Wi-Fi functions. You can also geotag your shots from a connected smartphone or tablet.

For convenience in this manual, smartphones, tablets, and other compatible devices are collectively referred to as

“smartphones”.

Connecting to Another Camera

Use the Wi-Fi function to send images between Canon-brand, compact digital cameras.

Connecting to a Computer

Use the software to wirelessly send images from the camera to a computer.

Connecting to a Printer

Send images wirelessly to a PictBridge-compatible printer

(supporting DPS over IP) to print them.

Before using Wi-Fi, be sure to read “Wi-Fi (Wireless LAN)

Precautions” ( = 210 ) and “Security Precautions” (

= 211 ).

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

125

Preparing to Share Images via Wi-Fi

Sending images via Wi-Fi requires some initial preparation on the camera and target devices. Preparations and methods of sending images vary depending on the destination.

Note that before using Wi-Fi (

=

133 ), you will need to register a camera

nickname on the camera.

Uploading Images to Web Services

SNS, videosharing sites, e-mail

CANON iMAGE

GATEWAY

Access point

Camera

Computer or smartphone browsers

Register Web services (

= 127 )

Connect via an access point ( = 134

)

Send images ( = 142

)*

* You can send images to a computer or Web service (

= 145 ).

Sending Images to a Smartphone

Internet

CameraWindow

Camera

Access point

Smartphone

Tablet computer

Install CameraWindow on a smartphone ( = 130 )

Connect directly (

= 139

) or via an access point ( = 134 )

Send images (

= 142

)

Sending Images to Another Camera

Camera

Connect to another camera (

=

141

)

Send images (

= 142

)

Camera

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

126

Sending Images to a Computer

Internet

CameraWindow

Access point

Camera

Computer

Check your computer environment ( = 131

)

Install CameraWindow on a computer ( = 131 )

Configure the computer for a Wi-Fi connection (Windows only, = 133

)

Connect via an access point ( = 134

)

Save images to a computer ( = 144

)

Printing Images Wirelessly

Camera Printer

Access point

Connect directly ( = 139

) or via an access point (

= 134

)

Print images ( = 176 )

Registering Web Services

Use a smartphone or computer to add to the camera Web services that you want to use.

A smartphone or computer with a browser and Internet connection is required to complete camera settings for CANON iMAGE GATEWAY and other Web services.

Check the CANON iMAGE GATEWAY website for details on browser

(Microsoft Internet Explorer, etc.) requirements, including settings and version information.

For information on countries and regions where CANON iMAGE

GATEWAY is available, visit the Canon website (http://www.canon.com/ cig/).

You must have an account with Web services other than CANON iMAGE

GATEWAY if you desire to use them. For further details, check the websites for each Web service you want to register.

Separate ISP connection and access point fees may be applicable.

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

127

Registering CANON iMAGE GATEWAY

After linking the camera and CANON iMAGE GATEWAY, add CANON iMAGE GATEWAY as a destination Web service on the camera.

1

Log in to CANON iMAGE

GATEWAY and access the camera settings page.

z z http://www.canon.com/cig/ and visit the

CANON iMAGE GATEWAY site for your region.

z z z z enter your user name and password to log in. If you do not have a CANON iMAGE GATEWAY account, follow the instructions to complete member registration (free of charge).

2

Choose your camera model.

z z ] is displayed in the Wi-Fi menu.

z z displayed for entering the authentication code. On this page in step 9, you will enter the authentication code displayed on the camera after steps 3 – 8.

3

Access the Wi-Fi menu.

z z

(

= 133

).

4

Choose [ ].

z z o

>< p

>< q

>< r

> buttons or turn the < 7 > dial to choose [ ], and then press the < m > button.

5

Establish a connection with the access point.

z z q

>< r

> buttons or turn the

< 7 > dial to choose [Authenticate], and then press the < m > button.

6

Choose an access point.

z z o >< p > buttons or turn the

<

7

> dial to choose a network (access point), and then press the < m > button.

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

128

7

Enter the access point password.

z z m > button to access the keyboard, and then enter the password

(

= 135

).

z z o >< p > buttons or turn the

< 7 > dial to choose [Next], and then press the < m

> button.

8

Choose [Auto] and establish the connection.

z z o >< p > buttons or turn the

< 7 > dial to choose [Auto], and then press the < m > button.

z z iMAGE GATEWAY via the access point, an authentication code is displayed.

9

Enter the authentication code.

z z the authentication code displayed on the camera and go to the next step.

z z displayed.

10

Check the confirmation

numbers and complete the setup process.

z z the camera matches the number on the smartphone or computer.

z z q >< r > buttons or turn the

<

7

> dial to choose [OK], and then press the < m > button.

z z smartphone or computer.

z z

= 145 ) and CANON iMAGE

GATEWAY are now added as destinations, and the [ ] icon changes to [ ].

z z smartphone or computer to indicate that this process is finished. To add other

Web services, follow the procedure in “Registering Other Web Services”

(

=

130 ) from step 2.

You can connect to WPS-compatible access points by choosing [WPS

Connection] in step 6. For details, see steps 6 – 8 in “Connecting to WPS-

Compatible Access Points” ( = 136 ).

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

129

Registering Other Web Services

You can also add Web services besides CANON iMAGE GATEWAY to the camera. Note that CANON iMAGE GATEWAY must be registered on the

camera first (

=

128

).

1

Access the Web service settings screen.

z z

iMAGE GATEWAY” (

=

128 ) to log in

to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY, and then access the Web service settings screen.

2

Configure the Web service you

want to use.

z z smartphone or computer to set up the

Web service.

3

Choose [ ].

z z

= 133

), choose

[ ] (either press the < o >< p >< q >< r > buttons or turn the < 7 > dial), and then press the < m

> button.

z z updated.

If any configured settings change, follow these steps again to update the camera settings.

Installing CameraWindow on a

Smartphone

Before connecting your camera to a smartphone, first install the free dedicated application, CameraWindow, on your smartphone.

1

Connect the smartphone to a network.

2

Install CameraWindow.

z z download and install CameraWindow from the App Store.

z z z install CameraWindow from Google Play.

z to establish a connection with the smartphone (

= 134

,

139

).

For details on this application (supported smartphones and included functions), refer to the Canon website.

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

130

Preparing to Register a Computer

Prepare to register a computer. To save images to the computer wirelessly, you must install CameraWindow.

Checking Your Computer Environment

The camera can connect via Wi-Fi to computers running the following operating systems. For detailed system requirements and compatibility information, including support in new operating systems, visit the Canon website.

Operating

System

Windows

Windows 8

Windows 7 SP1

Macintosh

Mac OS X 10.6.8

Mac OS X 10.7

Mac OS X 10.8.2 or later

Windows 7 Starter and Home Basic editions are not supported.

Windows 7 N (European version) and KN (South Korean version) require a separate download and installation of Windows Media

Feature Pack.

For details, check the following website.

http://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=159730

Installing the Software

Windows 7 and Mac OS X 10.6 are used here for the sake of illustration.

What you will need:

z z z z

* A USB cable is not included. Although you can install the software without using a cable, some features will not be added.

1

Download the software.

z z

Internet, access http://www.canon.com/ icpd/.

z z z z

2

Begin the installation.

z z on-screen instructions to complete the installation process.

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

131

3

When a message is displayed prompting you to connect the camera, choose whether to connect or not.

When Connecting the Camera to the Computer

z z cover ( ). With the smaller plug of the

USB cable in the orientation shown, insert the plug fully into the camera terminal ( ).

z z in the computer’s USB port. For details about USB connections on the computer, refer to the computer user manual.

z z on-screen instructions to complete the installation process.

Without Connecting the Camera

z z the device] and follow the on-screen instructions to complete the installation process.

4

Install the files.

z z depending on computer performance and the Internet connection.

z z z after installation.

z connected to the computer, turn the camera off before disconnecting the cable.

Using the software, you can update to the latest version, and download new functions via the Internet (some software excluded).

The first time you connect the camera to the computer, drivers will be installed, so it may take a few minutes until camera images are accessible.

Because the content and functions of software vary according to the camera model, if you have several cameras, you must use each camera to update to its latest version of the software.

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

132

Configuring the Computer for a Wi-Fi

Connection (Windows Only)

On a computer running Windows, configure the following settings before connecting the camera to the computer wirelessly.

1

Confirm that the computer is

connected to the access point.

z z connection, refer to the computer user manual.

2

Configure the setting.

z z

[All Programs]

[Canon Utilities]

[CameraWindow] ► [Wi-Fi connection setup].

z z on-screen instructions and configure the setting.

The following Windows settings are configured when you run the utility in step 2.

- Turn on media streaming.

This will enable the camera to see (find) the computer to access via Wi-Fi.

- Turn on network discovery.

This will enable the computer to see (find) the camera.

- Turn on ICMP (Internet Control Message Protocol).

This allows you to check the network connection status.

- Enable Universal Plug & Play (UPnP).

This will enable network devices to detect each other automatically.

Some security software may prevent you from completing the settings as described here. Check the settings of your security software.

Accessing the Wi-Fi Menu

Initial Connection via Wi-Fi

To start with, register a camera nickname.

This nickname will be displayed on the screen of target devices when connecting to other devices via Wi-Fi.

1

Access the Wi-Fi menu.

z z 1 > button to turn the camera on.

z z

2

Enter a nickname.

z z m > button to access the keyboard, and then enter a nickname

(

=

26 ).

z z z z o >< p > buttons or turn the

< 7 > dial to choose [OK], and then press the < m

> button.

z z

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

133

When connecting wirelessly to any device other than a computer, a memory card must be inserted in the camera. Additionally, the memory card must contain images in order for you to access Web services or connect to a smartphone or printer wirelessly.

To change the camera’s nickname, choose [Wi-Fi Settings] on the [ 3 ] tab, and then choose [Change Device Nickname].

Nicknames beginning with a space cannot be entered in step 2. If you attempt to do this and press the < n > button on the keyboard screen, a message will be displayed. Press the < m > button to access the keyboard, and then enter a new nickname.

After the Initial Wi-Fi Connection

Once you have connected to devices via Wi-Fi, recent destinations will be listed first when you access the Wi-Fi menu by pressing the < > button. You can easily connect again by pressing the < o

>< p

> buttons to choose the device name and then pressing the < m > button.

To add a new device, display the device selection screen by pressing the

< q

>< r

> buttons, and then configure the setting.

If you prefer not to display recent target devices, press the < n

> button, and on the [ 3 ] tab, choose [Wi-Fi Settings] ► [Target History] ► [Off].

Connecting via an Access Point

Connect to your access point via Wi-Fi as follows.

Also refer to the access point user manual.

Confirming Access Point Compatibility

Confirm that the Wi-Fi router or base station conforms to the Wi-Fi

standards in “Specifications” (

=

203 ).

If you are already using Wi-Fi, confirm the following items. For instructions on checking network settings, refer to the access point user manual.

If system administrator status is needed to adjust network settings, contact the system administrator for details.

These settings are very important for network security. Exercise adequate caution when changing these settings.

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

134

Check sheet

Network name (SSID/ESSID)

The SSID or ESSID for the access point you use.

Also called the “access point name” or “network name”.

Network authentication / data encryption (encryption method / encryption mode)

The method for encrypting data during wireless transmission.

○ None

○ WEP (open system authentication)

○ WPA-PSK (TKIP)

○ WPA-PSK (AES)

○ WPA2-PSK (TKIP)

○ WPA2-PSK (AES)

Password (encryption key / network key)

The key used when encrypting data during wireless transmission. Also called the “encryption key” or “network key”.

Key index (transmit key)

The key set when WEP is used for network authentication / data encryption.

○ 1

Connection methods vary depending on whether the access point supports

Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) or not. Refer to the user manual provided with your access point to check if it supports WPS.

A router is a device that creates a network (LAN) structure for connecting multiple computers. A router that contains an internal Wi-Fi function is called a

“Wi-Fi router”.

This guide refers to all Wi-Fi routers and base stations as “access points”.

If you use MAC address filtering on your Wi-Fi network, be sure to add the camera’s MAC address to your access point. You can check your camera’s

MAC address by choosing the [ 3 ] tab, [Wi-Fi Settings], and then [Check MAC

Address].

Connecting to WPS-Compatible Access Points

WPS makes it easy to complete settings when connecting devices over

Wi-Fi. You can use either Push Button Configuration Method or PIN Method for settings on a WPS supported device.

1

Confirm that the target device is

connected to the access point.

z z to Web services.

z z connection, refer to the device and access point user manuals.

2

Access the Wi-Fi menu

(

=

133

).

3

Choose the target device.

z z the < o

>< p

>< q

>< r

> buttons or turn the < 7 > dial), and then press the < m > button.

z z z z z z 2 ].

z z the service icon. If multiple recipients or sharing options are used with a Web service, choose the desired item on the

[Select Recipient] screen (either press the < o >< p > buttons or turn the < 7 > dial), and then press the < m

> button.

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

135

4

Choose [Add a Device].

z z o

>< p

> buttons or turn the

< 7 > dial to choose [Add a Device], and then press the < m > button.

5

To connect to a smartphone or printer:

Choose [Switch Network].

z z

is displayed (

=

139

), choose [Switch

Network] (either press the < q >< r > buttons or turn the < 7 > dial), and then press the < m > button.

6

Choose [WPS Connection].

z z o >< p > buttons or turn the

<

7

> dial to choose [WPS Connection], and then press the < m > button.

7

Choose [PBC Method].

z z o >< p > buttons or turn the

<

7

> dial to choose [PBC Method], and then press the < m > button.

8

Establish the connection.

z z z connection button for a few seconds.

z z m

> button.

z The camera will connect to the access point.

z z 2 ], or [ ] in step 3, devices connected to the access point are listed on the [Select a Device] screen displayed next.

z z step 3, go to step 11.

9

To connect to a smartphone, printer, or computer:

Choose the target device.

z z o >< p > buttons or turn the

< 7 > dial to choose the computer name, and then press the < m > button.

z z printer, or Macintosh computer, go to step 11.

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

136

10

If you have selected a computer running Windows in step 9 for

the first time:

Install a driver.

z z the camera, click the Start menu on the computer, click [Control Panel], and then click [Add a device].

z z z z z z the camera and computer connection is enabled, the AutoPlay screen will be displayed. Nothing will be displayed on the camera screen.

11

Send or print the images.

z z are connected varies depending on the target device.

z z smartphone or Web service, an image transfer screen is displayed. For instructions on sending images, see

“Sending Images” ( = 142 ).

z z computer, the camera screen is blank.

Follow the steps in “Saving Images to a

Computer” ( = 144 ) to save images to

the computer.

z z printer, you can print by following the same steps as for printing via USB. For

details, see “Printing Images” (

=

176 ).

If you chose [PIN Method] in step 7, a PIN code will be displayed on the screen. Be sure to set this code in the access point. Choose a device in the

[Select a Device] screen. For further details, refer to the user manual included with your access point.

To add multiple destinations, repeat this procedure from the first step.

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

137

Previous Access Points

You can reconnect to any previous access points automatically by following step 4 in “Connecting to WPS-Compatible Access Points” (

= 136 ).

To reconnect to the access point, confirm that the target device is already connected to it, and then follow the procedure from step 9. Note that this step is not required when connecting to Web services.

To switch access points, choose [Switch Network] on the screen displayed when you establish a connection, and then follow the procedure from step 6.

Connecting to Access Points in the List

1

View the listed access points.

z z points) as described in steps 1 – 5 of

“Connecting to WPS-Compatible Access

Points” (

= 135 –

136 ).

2

Choose an access point.

z z o >< p > buttons or turn the

< 7 > dial to choose a network (access point), and then press the < m > button.

3

Enter the access point password.

z z m > button to access the keyboard, and then enter the password

( = 135 ).

z z o >< p > buttons or turn the

< 7 > dial to choose [Next], and then press the < m

> button.

4

Choose [Auto].

z z o

>< p

> buttons or turn the

< 7 > dial to choose [Auto], and then press the < m > button.

z z 2 ], or [ ] as the target device, see “Connecting to WPS-

Compatible Access Points”, starting with step 9 (

=

136 ).

z z destination, see “Connecting to WPS-

Compatible Access Points”, starting with

step 11 ( = 137

).

To determine the access point password, check on the access point itself or refer to the user manual.

Up to 16 access points will be displayed. If no access points are detected, choose [Manual Settings] in step 2 to manually set an access point. Follow onscreen instructions and enter an SSID, security settings, and a password.

When you use an access point that you have already connected to for connecting to another device, [*] is displayed for the password in step 3. To use the same password, choose [Next] (either press the < o >< p > buttons or turn the < 7 > dial) and press the < m > button.

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

138

Connecting without an Access Point

When connecting to a smartphone or printer via Wi-Fi, you can use the camera as an access point (Camera Access Point mode) instead of using another access point.

Similarly, no access point is used in camera-to-camera connections

(

= 141

).

1

Access the Wi-Fi menu

(

=

133

).

2

Choose the target device.

z z the < o

>< p

>< q

>< r

> buttons or turn the < 7 > dial), and then press the < m > button.

z z z z 2

].

3

Choose [Add a Device].

z z o

>< p

> buttons or turn the

< 7 > dial to choose [Add a Device], and then press the < m > button.

z z

4

On the target device, connect

to the network identified on the

camera.

z z setting menu, choose the SSID (network name) displayed on the camera.

5

For a smartphone connection:

Start CameraWindow on the smartphone.

z z up, register a smartphone nickname for display on the camera.

z z the camera, the device connection screen will be displayed on the camera.

6

Choose the target device.

z z press the < o >< p > buttons or turn the

<

7

> dial), and then press the < m

> button.

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

139

7

For a smartphone connection:

Adjust the privacy setting.

z z q >< r > buttons or turn the

< 7 > dial to choose [Yes], and then press the < m > button.

z z receive images sent from the camera, or to geotag images on the camera

(

= 146

).

8

Send or print the images.

z z are connected varies depending on the target device.

z z smartphone, an image transfer screen is displayed. For instructions on sending

images, see “Sending Images” ( = 142 ).

z z printer, you can print by following the same steps as for printing via USB. For

details, see “Printing Images” ( = 176 ).

All images in the camera can be viewed from the connected smartphone when you choose [Yes] in step 7. To keep camera images private, so that they cannot be viewed from the smartphone, choose [No] in step 7.

To change privacy settings for smartphones added to the list, choose the smartphone whose settings you want to change from

[Edit a Device] in step 3, and then choose [View Settings].

To add multiple devices, repeat this procedure from the first step.

For better security, you can require password input on the screen in step 3 by accessing MENU and choosing [ 3 ] tab ► [Wi-Fi Settings] ► [Password]

► [On]. In this case, in the password field on the device in step 4, enter the password displayed on the camera.

Previous Access Points

You can reconnect to any previous access points automatically by following

step 3 in “Connecting without an Access Point” ( = 139 ).

To use the camera as an access point, choose [Switch Network] on the screen displayed when you establish a connection, and then choose [Set

Camera As Access Point].

When reconnecting via a previous access point, connect the target device to the access point in step 4.

To switch access points, choose [Switch Network] on the screen displayed when you establish a connection, and then follow the procedure in “Connecting to WPS-Compatible Access Points” from step 6

(

= 136 ).

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

140

Connecting to Another Camera

Connect two cameras via Wi-Fi and send images between them as follows.

Only Canon-brand cameras equipped with a Wi-Fi function can be connected to wirelessly. Even Canon-brand cameras that support Eye-Fi cards cannot be connected to if they do not have a Wi-Fi function. You cannot connect to

PowerShot SD430 DIGITAL ELPH WIRELESS/DIGITAL IXUS WIRELESS cameras with this camera.

1

Access the Wi-Fi menu

(

=

133

).

2

Choose camera.

z z o

>< p

>< q

>< r

> buttons or turn the < 7 > dial to choose [ 4 ], and then press the < m > button.

3

Choose [Add a Device].

z z o >< p > buttons or turn the

<

7

> dial to choose [Add a Device], and then press the < m > button.

z z too.

z z added when [Start connection on target camera] is displayed on both camera screens.

z z successfully, the image transfer screen will be displayed. Proceed to “Sending

Images” (

= 142 ).

To add multiple cameras, repeat the above procedures starting from step 1.

Once a camera is added, the camera name will be displayed on the screen in step 3. To connect to a camera again, simply choose the camera name from the list.

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

141

Sending Images

Send images wirelessly to destinations registered on the camera as follows.

Note that when images are sent to a computer, the computer is used instead of the camera (

= 144 ).

Sending Images Individually

1

Choose an image.

z z

7

> dial to choose an image to send.

2

Send the image.

z z q >< r > buttons to choose

[Send this image], and then press the

< m > button.

z z terms of service, choose [I Agree], and press the < m > button.

z z darkens during image transfer.

z z service, [OK] is displayed. Press the

< m > button to return to the playback screen.

z z smartphone, [Transfer completed] will be displayed, and the display will return to the image transfer screen.

For movies that you do not compress ( = 123

), a separate, compressed file is sent instead of the original file. Note that this may delay transmission, and the file cannot be sent unless there is enough space for it on the memory card.

Keep your fingers or other objects off the Wi-Fi antenna area ( = 4 ).

Covering this may decrease the speed of your image transfers.

Depending on the condition of the network you are using, it may take a long time to send movies. Be sure to keep an eye on the camera battery level.

When sending movies to smartphones, note that the supported image quality varies depending on the smartphone. For details, refer to the smartphone user manual.

To disconnect from the camera, press the < n

> button, choose [OK] on the confirmation screen (either press the < q >< r > buttons or turn the < 7 > dial), and then press the < m > button. You can also use the smartphone to end the connection.

On the screen, wireless signal strength is indicated by the following icons.

[ ] high, [ ] medium, [ ] low, [ ] weak

Sending images to Web services will take less time when resending images you have already sent that are still on the CANON iMAGE GATEWAY server.

Choosing the Image Resolution (Size)

On the image transfer screen, choose [ ] by pressing the < o >< p > buttons, and then press the < m

> button. On the next screen, choose the resolution by pressing the < o >< p > buttons, and then press the < m > button.

To send images at original size, select [No] as the resizing option.

Choosing [ ] or [ ] will resize images that are larger than the selected size before sending.

Movies cannot be resized.

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

142

Sending Multiple Images

1

Choose [Select and send].

z z q

>< r

> buttons to choose

[Select and send], and then press the

< m > button.

2

Choose images.

z z o >< p >< q >< r > buttons to choose an image to send, and then press the < m > button. [ ] is displayed.

z z m

> z button again. [ ] is no longer displayed.

Repeat this process to choose additional images.

z z the < n > button.

3

Send the images.

z z q >< r > buttons or turn the

< 7 > dial to choose [Send], and then press the < m

> button.

Up to 50 images can be sent together at once. Only one movie can be sent.

Movies up to five minutes (or digest movies up to 13 minutes) can be sent.

Web services may limit the number of images you can send. For details, refer to the Web service you are using.

You can also choose images in step 2 by moving the zoom lever twice toward

< k

> to access single-image display and then pressing the < q

>< r

> buttons or turning the < 7 > dial.

In step 3, you can choose the desired resolution (size) of your images before sending (

= 45

).

Adding Comments

Using the camera, you can add comments to images that you send to e-mail addresses, social networking services, etc. The number of characters and symbols that can be entered may differ depending on the Web service.

1

Access the screen for adding comments.

z z o >< p >< q >< r > buttons to choose [ ], and then press the < m > button.

2

Add a comment (

=

26

).

3

Send the image.

z z

Individually” ( = 142 ) to send the image.

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

When a comment is not entered, the comment set in CANON iMAGE

GATEWAY is automatically sent.

143

Saving Images to a Computer

When sending images to a computer, use the computer instead of the camera.

Windows 7 and Mac OS X 10.6 are used here for the sake of illustration.

For other functions, refer to the help system of the relevant software (some software excluded).

1

Display CameraWindow.

z z clicking [Downloads Images From Canon

Camera].

z z

CameraWindow is automatically displayed when a Wi-Fi connection is established between the camera and computer.

2

Import images.

z z then click [Import Untransferred Images].

z z folder on the computer, in separate folders named by date.

z z after image import is complete. For instructions on viewing images on a computer, refer to “Software Instruction

Manual” ( = 173

).

Movies will take longer to import since the file size is larger than still images.

To disconnect from the camera, turn off the camera.

You can also specify to save all images or only selected images to the computer, and you can change the destination folder. Refer to “Software

Instruction Manual” ( = 173 ) for details.

In Windows 7, if the screen in step 2 is not displayed, click the [ ] icon in the taskbar.

If CameraWindow is not displayed when using a Macintosh computer, click the

[CameraWindow] icon in the Dock.

Although you can save images to a computer simply by connecting your camera to the computer without using the software, the following limitations apply.

- It may take a few minutes after you connect the camera to the computer until camera images are accessible.

- Images shot in vertical orientation may be saved in horizontal orientation.

- RAW images (or JPEG images recorded with RAW images) may not be saved.

- Image protection settings may be cleared from images saved to a computer.

- Some problems may occur when saving images or image information, depending on the operating system version, the software in use, or image file sizes.

- Some functions provided by the software may not be available, such as movie editing.

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

144

Sending Images Automatically

(Image Sync)

Images on the memory card that have not been transferred already can be sent to a computer or Web services via CANON iMAGE GATEWAY.

Note that images cannot be sent only to Web services.

Initial Preparations

Install and configure the software on the destination computer.

1

Install the software.

z z

connected to the Internet ( = 131

).

2

Register the camera.

z z and then click [Add new camera].

z z and then click [Add new camera].

z z the cameras listed, which are linked to

CANON iMAGE GATEWAY ( = 128

).

z z to receive images, the icon changes to

[ ].

3

Choose the type of images to send (only when sending movies with images).

z z n > button, and then choose [Wi-Fi Settings] on the [ 3 ] tab

( = 25 ).

z z o >< p > buttons to choose

[Image Sync], and then press the

< q

>< r

> buttons to choose [Stills/

Movies].

To choose a Web service as the destination, follow the steps in “Registering

Other Web Services” (

= 130

) to update the camera settings.

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

145

Sending Images

Images sent from the camera are automatically saved to the computer.

If the computer that you intend to send images to is turned off, the images will be stored temporarily on the CANON iMAGE GATEWAY server. Stored images are regularly erased, so make sure to turn on the computer and save the images.

z z

Compatible Access Points” ( = 135 ) to

choose [ ].

z z images are sent.

z z successfully to the CANON iMAGE

GATEWAY server, [ ] is displayed on the screen.

z z z computer when you turn it on.

z services from the CANON iMAGE

GATEWAY server, even if the computer is off.

When sending images, you should use a fully charged battery pack

or an AC adapter kit (sold separately, = 160

).

Even if images were imported to the computer through a different method, any images not sent to the computer via CANON iMAGE GATEWAY will be sent to the computer.

Sending is faster when the destination is a computer on the same network as the camera, because images are sent via the access point instead of CANON iMAGE GATEWAY. Note that images stored on the computer are sent to

CANON iMAGE GATEWAY, so the computer must be connected to the Internet.

Geotagging Images on the Camera

GPS data recorded on a smartphone using the dedicated CameraWindow application (

=

130 ) can be added to images on the camera. Images are

tagged with information including the latitude, longitude, and elevation.

Before shooting, make sure the date and time and your home time

zone are set correctly. (See “Setting the Date and Time” (

=

14 ).)

Additionally, in [Time Zone] (

= 151 ), specify any shooting

destinations that are in other time zones.

The smartphone you will use for geotagging must be authorized to

view the images on the camera (

=

140 ).

Others may be able to locate or identify you by using location data in your geotagged still images or movies. Be careful when sharing these images with others, as when posting images online where many others can view them.

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

146

Editing or Erasing Wi-Fi Settings

Edit or erase Wi-Fi settings as follows.

Editing Connection Information

1

Access the Wi-Fi menu

(

=

133

).

2

Choose a device to edit.

z z o >< p >< q >< r > buttons or turn the < 7 > dial to choose the icon of the device to edit, and then press the

< m > button.

3

Choose [Edit a Device].

z z o >< p > buttons or turn the

<

7

> dial to choose [Edit a Device], and then press the < m > button.

4

Choose a device to edit.

z z o >< p > buttons or turn the

< 7 > dial to choose the device to edit, and then press the < m > button.

Configurable Items

[Change Device Nickname] (

=

147

)

[View Settings] (

= 140

)

[Erase Connection Info] (

= 148 )

5

Choose an item to edit.

z z o >< p > buttons or turn the

<

7

> dial to choose an item to edit, and then press the < m > button.

z z what device or service the camera will access.

4

O

O

Connection

O

O

O

– c

O

Web

Services

O O O

O : Configurable

: Not configurable

Changing a Device Nickname

You can change the device nickname (display name) that is displayed on the camera.

z z

Information” (

=

147

), choose [Change

Device Nickname] and press the < m > button.

z z m > button. Use the keyboard displayed to

enter a new nickname ( = 26 ).

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

147

Erasing Connection Information

Erase connection information (information about devices that you have connected to) as follows.

z z

Information” (

= 147 ), choose [Erase

Connection Info] and press the < m

> button.

z z

< q

>< r

> buttons or turn the <

7

> dial to choose [OK], and then press the < m > button.

z z erased.

Returning the Wi-Fi Settings to Default

Return the Wi-Fi settings to default if you transfer ownership of the camera to another person, or dispose of it.

1

Choose [Wi-Fi Settings].

z z n

> button, and then choose [Wi-Fi Settings] on the [ 3 ] tab

( = 25 ).

2

Choose [Reset Settings].

z z o >< p > buttons or turn the

< 7 > dial to choose [Reset Settings], and then press the < m

> button.

3

Restore the default settings.

z z q >< r > buttons or turn the

< 7 > dial to choose [OK], and then press the < m > button.

z z

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

Resetting the Wi-Fi settings will also clear all Web service settings. Be sure that you want to reset all Wi-Fi settings before using this option.

To reset other settings (aside from Wi-Fi) to defaults, choose [Reset All] in the

[ 3 ] tab (

= 157

).

148

8

Setting Menu

Customize or adjust basic camera functions for greater convenience

Adjusting Basic Camera Functions ..............

150

Silencing Camera Operations .............................

150

Adjusting the Volume ..........................................

150

Customizing Sounds ...........................................

150

Hiding Hints and Tips ..........................................

151

Date and Time .....................................................

151

World Clock .........................................................

151

Lens Retraction Timing .......................................

152

Using Eco Mode ..................................................

152

Power-Saving Adjustment ...................................

152

Screen Brightness ...............................................

153

Start-Up Screen ..................................................

153

Formatting Memory Cards ..................................

153

File Numbering ....................................................

154

Date-Based Image Storage .................................

155

Metric / Non-Metric Display .................................

155

Electronic Level Calibration .................................

155

Setting Copyright Information to Record in

Images ................................................................

156

Checking Certification Logos ..............................

156

Display Language ...............................................

157

Adjusting Other Settings .....................................

157

Restoring Defaults ...............................................

157

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

149

Adjusting Basic Camera Functions

Functions can be configured on the [ 3 ] tab. Customize commonly used

functions as desired, for greater convenience (

=

25 ).

Silencing Camera Operations

Silence camera sounds and movies as follows.

z z

Operation can also be silenced by holding down the < p > button as you turn the camera on.

Sound is not played during movies ( = 102

) if you mute camera sounds. To restore sound during movies, press the < o

> button. Adjust volume with the

< o >< p > buttons, as needed.

Adjusting the Volume

Adjust the volume of individual camera sounds as follows.

z z z

< m > button.

z

< q >< r > buttons to adjust the volume.

Customizing Sounds

Customize camera operating sounds as follows.

z z z the < m

> button.

Choose an item, and then press the

< q

>< r

> buttons to choose an option.

The shutter sound in digest movies recorded in [ ] mode (

=

31

) cannot be changed.

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

150

Hiding Hints and Tips

Hints and tips are normally shown when you choose FUNC. (

=

24

) or

MENU (

= 25

) items. If you prefer, you can deactivate this information.

z z

[Off].

Date and Time

Adjust the date and time as follows.

z z

< m > button.

z z q >< r > buttons to choose an option, and then adjust the setting, either by pressing the < o >< p > buttons or turning the <

7

> dial.

World Clock

To ensure that your shots will have the correct local date and time when you travel abroad, simply register the destination in advance and switch to that time zone. This convenient feature eliminates the need to change the Date/

Time setting manually.

Before using the world clock, be sure to set the date and time and your

home time zone, as described in “Setting the Date and Time” ( = 14 ).

1

Specify your destination.

z z z

< m > button.

z o

>< p

> buttons or turn the

< 7 > dial to choose [ World], and then press the < m > button.

z z q >< r > buttons or turn the

< 7 > dial to choose the destination.

z z ahead), press the < o >< p > buttons to choose [ ].

z z m > button.

2

Switch to the destination time zone.

z z o >< p > buttons or turn the

<

7

> dial to choose [ World], and then press the < n > button.

z z

( = 191 ).

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

Adjusting the date or time while in [ ] mode (

= 15 ) will automatically

update your [ Home] time and date.

151

Lens Retraction Timing

The lens is normally retracted for safety about one minute after you press the < 1 > button in Shooting mode (

= 21

). To have the lens retracted immediately after you press the <

1

> button, set the retraction timing to

[0 sec.].

z z

[0 sec.].

Using Eco Mode

This function allows you to conserve battery power in Shooting mode. When the camera is not in use, the screen quickly darkens to reduce battery consumption.

1

Configure the setting.

z z z [

[On].

z ] is now shown on the shooting

screen (

= 191

).

z z is not used for approximately two seconds; approximately ten seconds after darkening, the screen turns off.

The camera turns off after approximately three minutes of inactivity.

2

Shoot.

z z shooting when the screen is off but the lens is still out, press the shutter button halfway.

Power-Saving Adjustment

Adjust the timing of automatic camera and screen deactivation (Auto Power

Down and Display Off, respectively) as needed (

= 21

).

z z z the < m

> button.

After choosing an item, press the

< q

>< r

> buttons to adjust it as needed.

To conserve battery power, you should normally choose [On] for

[Auto Power Down] and [1 min.] or less for [Display Off].

The [Display Off] setting is applied even if you set [Auto Power Down] to [Off].

These power-saving functions are not available when you have set Eco mode

(

= 152

) to [On].

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

152

Screen Brightness

Adjust screen brightness as follows.

z z press the < q >< r > buttons to adjust the brightness.

For maximum brightness, press and hold the < p > button for at least one second when the shooting screen is displayed or when in single-image display.

(This will override the [LCD Brightness] setting on the [ 3 ] tab.) To restore the original brightness, press and hold the < p

> button again for at least one second or restart the camera.

Start-Up Screen

Customize the start-up screen shown after you turn the camera on as follows.

z z z the < m

> button.

Press the < q >< r > buttons or turn the

<

7

> dial to choose an option.

Formatting Memory Cards

Before using a new memory card or a card formatted in another device, you should format the card with this camera.

Formatting erases all data on a memory card. Before formatting, copy images on the memory card to a computer, or take other steps to back them up.

1

Access the [Format] screen.

z z

< m > button.

2

Choose [OK].

z z o >< p > buttons to choose

[Cancel], choose [OK] (either press the

< q >< r > buttons or turn the < 7 > dial), and then press the < m

> button.

3

Format the memory card.

z z the < o >< p > buttons or turn the < 7 > dial to choose [OK], and then press the

< m > button.

z z card formatting complete] is displayed.

Press the < m > button.

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

Formatting or erasing data on a memory card only changes file management information on the card and does not erase the data completely. When transferring or disposing of memory cards, take steps to protect personal information if necessary, as by physically destroying cards.

153

The total card capacity indicated on the formatting screen may be less than the advertised capacity.

Low-Level Formatting

Perform low-level formatting in these cases: [Memory card error] is displayed, the camera is not working correctly, card image reading/writing is slower, continuous shooting is slower, or movie recording suddenly stops.

Low-level formatting erases all data on a memory card. Before low-level formatting, copy images on the memory card to a computer, or take other steps to back them up.

z z

Memory Cards” (

=

153

), press the

< o >< p > buttons or turn the < 7 > dial to choose [Low Level Format], and then press the < q >< r > buttons to select this option. A [ ] icon is displayed.

z z

Cards” (

=

153

) to continue with the formatting process.

Low-level formatting takes longer than “Formatting Memory Cards” ( = 153 ),

because data is erased from all storage regions of the memory card.

You can cancel low-level formatting in progress by choosing [Stop]. In this case, all data will be erased, but the memory card can be used normally.

File Numbering

Your shots are automatically numbered in sequential order (0001 – 9999) and saved in folders that store up to 2,000 images each. You can change how the camera assigns file numbers.

z z choose an option.

Continuous

Auto Reset

Images are numbered consecutively (until the 9999th shot is taken/ saved) even if you switch memory cards.

Image numbering is reset to 0001 if you switch memory cards, or when a new folder is created.

Regardless of the option selected in this setting, shots may be numbered consecutively after the last number of existing images on newly inserted memory cards. To start saving shots from 0001, use an empty (or formatted

(

= 153

)) memory card.

Refer to “Software Instruction Manual” ( = 173 ) for information on the card

folder structure and image formats.

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

154

Date-Based Image Storage

Instead of saving images in folders created each month, you can have the camera create folders each day you shoot to store shots taken that day.

z z

[Daily].

z z created on the shooting date.

Metric / Non-Metric Display

Change the unit of measurement shown in the zoom bar (

= 29

), the MF

indicator ( = 78 ), GPS information for elevation (

= 146

), and elsewhere from m/cm to ft/in as needed.

z z

Electronic Level Calibration

Calibrate the electronic level if it seems ineffective in helping you level the camera.

1

Make sure the camera is level.

z z as a table.

2

Calibrate the electronic level.

z z the < m > button.

z z

Roll Calibration], and to adjust forward/ backward tilt, choose [Vertical Pitch

Calibration], followed by the < m

> button.

A confirmation message is displayed.

z z m

> button.

Resetting the Electronic Level

Restore the electronic level to its original state as follows. Note that this is not possible unless you have calibrated the electronic level.

z z the < m > button.

z z

< m > button.

z z the menu screen is displayed again.

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

155

Setting Copyright Information to Record in

Images

To record the author’s name and copyright details in images, set this information beforehand as follows.

z z z the < m

> button.

Press the < o >< p > buttons or turn the <

7

> dial to choose [Enter Author’s

Name] or [Enter Copyright Details]. Press the < m > button to access the keyboard,

and enter the name ( = 26 ).

z z n > button. When [Accept changes?] is displayed, choose [Yes]

(either press the < q

>< r

> buttons or turn the < 7 > dial), and then press the < m > button.

z z recorded in images.

To check the information entered, choose [Display Copyright Info] on the screen above, and then press the < m > button.

You can also use the software (

= 173

) to enter, change, and delete copyright information. Some characters entered with the software may not display on the camera, but will be correctly recorded in images.

You can check copyright information recorded in images by using the software, once you save the images to a computer.

Deleting All Copyright Information

You can delete both the author’s name and copyright details at the same time as follows.

z z

Information to Record in Images”

(

=

156 ) and choose [Delete Copyright

Info].

z z q

>< r

> buttons or turn the

< 7 > dial to choose [OK], and then press the < m > button.

The copyright info already recorded in images will not be deleted.

Checking Certification Logos

Some logos for certification requirements met by the camera can be viewed on the screen. Other certification logos are printed in this guide, on the camera packaging, or on the camera body.

z z then press the < m > button.

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

156

Display Language

Change the display language as needed.

z z z the < m > button.

z o

>< p

>< q

>< r

> buttons or turn the < 7 > dial to choose a language, and then press the < m > button.

You can also access the [Language] screen in Playback mode by pressing and holding the < m > button and immediately pressing the < n > button.

Adjusting Other Settings

The following settings can also be adjusted on the [ 3 ] tab.

[Video System] (

= 165 )

[Ctrl via HDMI] (

= 164

)

[Wi-Fi Settings] (

= 124 )

Restoring Defaults

If you accidentally change a setting, you can restore default camera settings.

1

Access the [Reset All] screen.

z z

< m > button.

2

Restore default settings.

z z q >< r > buttons or turn the

< 7 > dial to choose [OK], and then press the < m

> button.

z z

The following functions are not restored to default settings.

- Information registered using Face ID (

= 39

)

- [

3

] tab settings [Date/Time] (

=

151 ), [Time Zone] (

=

151

) [Language ]

( = 157

), and [Video System] ( = 165 )

- Custom white balance data you have recorded (

=

74 )

- Shooting mode chosen in [ K ] (

= 52 ) or [

] (

= 54 ) mode

-

Exposure compensation ( = 68

) setting

- Movie mode (

= 65 )

- Wi-Fi settings (

=

124

)

- Calibrated value for the electronic level (

= 155

)

-

Copyright information ( = 156 )

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

157

9

Accessories

Enjoy the camera in more ways with optional Canon accessories and other compatible accessories sold separately

System Map ....................................................

159

Optional Accessories.....................................

160

Power Supplies ...................................................

160

Flash Units ..........................................................

161

Other Accessories ...............................................

162

Printers ................................................................

162

Using Optional Accessories..........................

163

Playback on a TV ................................................

163

Powering the Camera with Household Power .....

165

Using a Tele-Converter (Sold Separately) ...........

166

Using a Lens Hood ..............................................

167

Using Lens Filters (Sold Separately) ...................

167

Using a Remote Switch (Sold Separately) ..........

168

Using an External Flash (Sold Separately) .........

169

Using the Software .........................................

173

Software ..............................................................

173

Computer Connections via a Cable ....................

174

Saving Images to a Computer .............................

174

Printing Images ..............................................

176

Easy Print ............................................................

176

Configuring Print Settings ...................................

177

Printing Movie Scenes ........................................

179

Adding Images to the Print List (DPOF) ..............

180

Adding Images to a Photobook ...........................

182

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

158

System Map

Included Accessories

Neck Strap

Battery Pack

NB-10L*

1

(with terminal cover)

Battery Charger

CB-2LC/CB-2LCE*

1

Power

AC Adapter Kit

ACK-DC80

USB Cable (camera end: Mini-B)* 2

Memory Card Card Reader

Cables

HDMI Cable HTC-100

Stereo AV Cable AVC-DC400ST

Windows/

Macintosh

Computer

TV/Video

System

Flash Units

High-Power

Flash

HF-DC2*

3

Speedlite*

4

600EX-RT, 600EX,

580EX II, 430EX II,

320EX, 270EX II

Macro Twin Lite

MT-24EX*

Cases

5

*

6

Macro Ring Lite

MR-14EX*

Soft Case

SC-DC85

6

Waterproof Case

WP-DC52

Lens Accessories

Tele-Converter

TC-DC58E*

6

Canon-Brand Lens Filter

(58 mm dia.)*

7

Canon-Brand PictBridge-Compatible Printers

Other Accessories

Remote Switch RS-60E3

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

159

*1 Also available for purchase separately.

*2 A genuine Canon accessory is also available (Interface Cable IFC-400PCU).

*3 High-Power Flash HF-DC1 also supported.

*4 These accessories are also supported: Speedlite 580EX, 430EX, 270EX, and

220EX, Speedlite Transmitter ST-E2, Speedlite Bracket SB-E2, and Off-Camera

Shoe Cord OC-E3.

*5 Requires Bracket BKT-DC1 and Off-Camera Shoe Cord OC-E3.

*6 Requires Conversion Lens Adapter LA-DC58L.

*7 Requires Filter Adapter FA-DC58D.

Use of genuine Canon accessories is recommended.

This product is designed to achieve excellent performance when used with genuine

Canon accessories.

Canon shall not be liable for any damage to this product and/or accidents such as fire, etc., caused by the malfunction of non-genuine Canon accessories (e.g., a leakage and/or explosion of a battery pack). Please note that this warranty does not apply to repairs arising out of the malfunction of non-genuine Canon accessories, although you may request such repairs on a chargeable basis.

Note that availability varies by area, and some accessories may no longer be available.

Optional Accessories

The following camera accessories are sold separately. Note that availability varies by area, and some accessories may no longer be available.

Power Supplies

Battery Pack NB-10L

z z

Battery Charger CB-2LC/CB-2LCE

z z

AC Adapter Kit ACK-DC80

z z household power. Recommended when using the camera over extended periods, or when connecting the camera to a printer or computer. Cannot be used to charge the battery pack in the camera.

The battery charger and AC adapter kit can be used in areas with

100 – 240 V AC power (50/60 Hz).

For power outlets in a different format, use a commercially available adapter for the plug. Never use an electrical transformer designed for traveling, which may damage the battery pack.

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

160

Flash Units

High-Power Flash HF-DC2

z z that are out of range of the built-in flash.

High-Power Flash HF-DC1 can also be used.

Speedlite 600EX-RT, 600EX,

580EX II, 430EX II, 320EX, 270EX II

z z many styles of flash photography.

Speedlite 580EX, 430EX, 270EX, and

220EX are also supported.

Speedlite Bracket SB-E2

z z subjects during vertical shooting. Includes

Off-Camera Shoe Cord OC-E3.

Speedlite Transmitter ST-E2

z z

Speedlite flash units (except Speedlite

220EX/270EX).

Macro Twin Lite MT-24EX

Macro Ring Lite MR-14EX

z z many styles of macro flash photography.

Requires Conversion Lens Adapter

LA-DC58L, Off-Camera Shoe Cord

OC-E3, and Bracket BKT-DC1 (all sold separately) for attachment to the camera.

Requires Conversion Lens Adapter

LA-DC58L (sold separately) for attachment to the camera.

Off-Camera Shoe Cord OC-E3

z z the camera.

Bracket BKT-DC1

z z the camera.

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

161

Other Accessories

Soft Case SC-DC85

z z scratches.

Handle with care to prevent leather discoloration.

Waterproof Case WP-DC52

z z up to 40 meters (130 ft.). Also useful for shooting in the rain, at the beach, or on ski slopes.

Interface Cable IFC-400PCU

z z or printer.

Stereo AV Cable AVC-DC400ST

z z playback on the larger TV screen.

HDMI Cable HTC-100

z z input of a high-definition TV.

Tele-Converter TC-DC58E

z z increase the focal length by a factor of approximately 1.4x.

Printers

Conversion Lens Adapter

LA-DC58L

z z converter or Macro Ring Lite/Macro Twin

Lite flash to the camera.

Remote Switch RS-60E3

z z

(pressing the button halfway or all the way down).

Filter Adapter FA-DC58D

z z mm filter.

Canon Lens Filter (58 mm dia.)

z z shooting effects.

Canon-Brand PictBridge-

Compatible Printers

z z possible by connecting the camera to a Canon-brand PictBridge-compatible printer.

For details, visit your nearest Canon retailer.

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

162

Still Images

Using Optional Accessories

Movies

Still Images Movies

Playback on a TV

By connecting the camera to a TV, you can view your shots on the larger screen of the TV.

For details on connection or how to switch inputs, refer to the TV manual.

Some information may not be displayed on the TV ( = 192

).

Still Images Movies

Playback on a High-Definition TV

Connecting the camera to an HDTV with the HDMI Cable HTC-100 (sold separately) enables you to view your shots on the larger screen of the TV.

Movies shot at a resolution of [ in high definition.

], [ ], or [ ] can be viewed

1

Make sure the camera and TV are off.

2

Connect the camera to the TV.

z z the HDMI input as shown.

z z and insert the cable plug fully into the camera terminal.

3

Turn the TV on and switch to video input.

z z connected the cable to in step 2.

4

Turn the camera on.

z z 1 > button to turn the camera on.

z z displayed on the TV. (Nothing is displayed on the camera screen.) z z

TV before disconnecting the cable.

Camera operating sounds are not played while the camera is connected to an

HDTV.

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

163

Still Images Movies

Controlling the Camera with a TV Remote

Connecting the camera to an HDMI CEC-compatible TV enables playback

(including slideshow playback) using the TV remote control.

Depending on the TV, you may need to adjust some TV settings. For details, refer to the TV manual.

1

Configure the setting.

z z n

> button, choose

[Ctrl via HDMI] on the [ 3 ] tab, and then

choose [Enable] ( = 25 ).

2

Connect the camera to the TV.

z z

High-Definition TV” (

=

163

) to connect the camera to the TV.

3

Display images.

z z

< 1 > button.

z z displayed on the TV. (Nothing is displayed on the camera screen.)

4

Control the camera with the TV remote.

z z q

>< r

> buttons on the remote z to browse images.

To display the camera control panel, press the OK/Select button. Select control panel options by pressing the

< q >< r > buttons to choose an option, and then pressing the OK/Select button again.

Camera Control Panel Options Shown on the TV

Return

Group Playback

Play Movie

.

Slideshow

Index Playback l

Change Display

Closes the menu.

Displays sets of images, either from continuous shooting

(

= 76

) in [ G ], [ M ], [ B ], or [ D

] mode ( = 67

, 92

,

or 93

) or individual still images saved as source data in

[ ] mode ( = 63

). (Only displayed when a grouped image is selected.)

Starts movie playback. (Only displayed when a movie is selected.)

Starts slideshow playback. To switch images during playback, press the < q >< r > buttons on the remote control.

Displays multiple images in an index.

Switches display modes (

= 103 ).

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

Pressing buttons, such as the < n > button, on the camera will switch control to the camera itself, which will prevent remote control until you return to single-image display.

The camera may not always respond correctly even if the remote is for an

HDMI CEC-compatible TV.

164

Still Images Movies

Playback on a Standard-Definition TV

Connecting the camera to a TV with the Stereo AV Cable AVC-DC400ST

(sold separately) enables you to view your shots on the larger screen of the

TV as you control the camera.

Yellow

Yellow

White

Red

1

Make sure the camera and TV are off.

2

Connect the camera to the TV.

z z the video inputs as shown.

Red

White z z and insert the cable plug fully into the camera terminal.

3

Display images.

z z

High-Definition TV” (

= 163

) to display images.

Correct display is not possible unless the camera video output format (NTSC or PAL) matches the TV format. To change the video output format, press the < n > button and choose [Video

System] on the [

3

] tab.

When the camera and TV are connected, you can also shoot while previewing shots on the larger screen of the TV. To shoot, follow the same steps as when using the camera screen. However, AF-Point Zoom (

= 47 ), MF-Point

Zoom (

=

79

), MF Peaking (

=

79 ) and Night Display (

=

90

) are not available.

Still Images Movies

Powering the Camera with Household Power

Powering the camera with AC Adapter Kit ACK-DC80 (sold separately) eliminates the need to monitor the remaining battery level.

1

Make sure the camera is off.

2

Connect the adapter to the coupler.

z z coupler.

3

Insert the coupler.

z z

Pack and Memory Card” (

=

13 ) to

open the cover, and then insert the coupler as shown until it locks into place.

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

165

z z cable in the coupler cable port ( ).

z z place.

Coupler Cable Port

4

Connect the power cord.

z z compact power adapter, and then plug the other end into a power outlet.

z z z z unplug the power cord from the outlet.

Do not disconnect the adapter or unplug the power cord while the camera is still on. This may erase your shots or damage the camera.

Do not attach the adapter or adapter cord to other objects. Doing so could result in malfunction or damage to the product.

Still Images Movies

Using a Tele-Converter (Sold Separately)

Attaching Tele-converter TC-DC58E and Conversion Lens Adapter

LA-DC58L (both sold separately) enables you to use a focal length of 1.4x.

1

Remove the ring.

z z z z and turn the ring in the direction of the arrow ( ).

z z ○ mark on the ring with the ● mark on the camera, and then lift the ring off.

2

Attach the conversion lens adapter.

z z ○ mark on the conversion lens adapter with the

mark on the camera, and then turn the adapter in the direction of the arrows until it locks.

z z ring release button and turn the adapter in the opposite direction.

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

166

3

Attach the tele-converter lens.

z z to attach it securely to the camera.

4

Specify the converter in the camera settings.

z z z z n

> button and choose

[Converter] on the [ 4 ] tab. Press the

< q >< r > buttons to choose [TC-DC58E].

z z setting when [IS Mode] is set to [Off].

z z return the converter setting to [None].

Vignetting may occur (especially in the lower right) when the built-in flash is used.

Set the camera to maximum telephoto when using the teleconverter. At other zoom positions, vignetting may occur.

Use the LCD monitor to compose shots. The view through the viewfinder may be partially obstructed by vignetting.

Before use, remove all dust or debris from the conversion lens with a lens blower brush.

Still Images Movies

Using a Lens Hood

Attaching the lens hood included with Tele-converter TC-DC58E (sold separately) can reduce the effect of extraneous light outside the angle of view when shooting backlit subjects, or when the camera is aimed toward a bright light source.

z z z as shown and attach it securely.

z attach it inverted.

Vignetting may occur if you use the built-in flash when the lens hood is attached.

Still Images

Using Lens Filters (Sold Separately)

Movies

Attaching a lens filter to the camera protects the lens and allows you to shoot with various effects. To attach a lens filter, you will need Filter Adapter

FA-DC58D (sold separately).

1

Remove the ring.

z z

(Sold Separately)” (

=

166 ) to remove

the ring.

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

167

2

Attach the filter adapter.

z z ○ mark on the filter adapter with the

mark on the camera, and then turn the adapter in the direction of the arrows until it locks in place.

z z camera, hold down the ring release button, and turn the adapter in the opposite direction.

3

Attach a filter.

z z direction of the arrow.

We recommend the use of genuine Canon filters (58 mm dia.).

When not using auto focus to shoot, set the manual focus option

[Safety MF] to [On].

If you use the built-in flash with the filter adapter attached, portions of the image may appear darker.

When using the filter adapter, be sure to use only one filter at a time.

Attaching multiple filters, or accessories such as a heavy lens, may cause the attachments to fall off and become damaged.

Do not grip the filter adapter tightly.

Remove the filter adapter when not using a filter.

The filter adapter and a lens hood cannot be attached to the camera at the same time.

Still Images

Using a Remote Switch (Sold Separately)

An optional Remote Switch RS-60E3 can be used to avoid camera shake that may otherwise occur when pressing the shutter button directly. This optional accessory is convenient when shooting at slow shutter speeds.

1

Connect the remote switch.

z z z z remote switch plug.

2

Shoot.

z z remote switch.

Bulb photography (long exposures) is not supported.

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

168

Still Images Movies

Using an External Flash (Sold Separately)

More sophisticated flash photography is possible with an optional Speedlite

EX series flash. For movie shooting using an LED light, the optional

Speedlite 320EX flash is available.

This camera does not support some Speedlite EX series functions.

Wireless operation of the Speedlite 600EX-RT is not supported.

Non-EX series Canon flash units may not fire correctly or may not fire at all, in some cases.

Use of non-Canon flash units (especially high-voltage flash units) or flash accessories may prevent normal camera operation and may damage the camera.

Also refer to the Speedlite EX series manual for additional information.

Still Images Movies

Speedlite EX Series

These optional flash units can provide bright lighting and meet a variety of flash photography needs.

1

Attach the flash.

z z attach the flash unit to the hot shoe.

2

Turn the flash on, and then turn

the camera on.

z z h ] icon is now displayed.

z z flash is ready.

3

Choose shooting mode [

G

],

[

M

], [

B

], or [

D

].

z z these modes. In other modes, the flash is adjusted and fired automatically, as needed.

4

Set the white balance to [

h

]

(

=

74

).

5

Configure the external flash.

z z n > button, choose [Flash

Control] on the [ 4 ] tab, and then press the < m > button.

z z displayed.

z z o >< p > buttons or turn the < 7 > dial to choose an item, and then adjust the setting by pressing the

< q >< r > buttons.

z z shooting mode and the flash attached

( = 172 ).

Settings for the built-in flash cannot be configured while a Speedlite EX series flash is attached, because that setting screen is no longer accessible.

You can also access the setting screen by pressing the < r > button for at least one second.

Flash settings in [ ] shooting mode can be configured just as they are in [ G ] mode.

600EX-RT/580EX II only: [Flash Control] is not available if the external flash has been set up for stroboscopic flash.

320EX only: Auto LED lighting is only available in low-light movie recording or in Movie mode. In this case, the [ ] icon is shown.

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

169

Still Images Movies

Using Speedlite Bracket SB-E2 (Sold Separately)

z z

E2 can help prevent unnatural shadows next to subjects during vertical shooting.

Still Images

Macro Ring Lite MR-14EX

This optional flash unit enables many styles of macro flash photography.

Requires Conversion Lens Adapter LA-DC58L (sold separately) for attachment to the camera.

Attach

Detach

Attach to camera

1

Prepare the conversion lens adapter.

z z the direction indicated by the arrow to separate the front and back sections.

z z the Macro Ring Lite MR-14EX or Macro

Twin Lite MT-24EX.

2

Remove the ring.

z z z z and turn the ring in the direction of the arrow ( ).

z z ○ mark on the ring with the ● mark on the camera, and then lift the ring off.

3

Attach the back section of the conversion lens adapter.

z z

mark on the back section with the ● mark on the camera, and then turn the adapter in the direction of the arrows until it locks in place.

z z ring release button and turn the adapter in the opposite direction.

4

Attach the controller to the camera.

z z macro ring lite to the hot shoe on top of the camera.

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

170

5

Attach the flash unit to the

conversion lens adapter.

z z of the macro ring lite in and attach the macro ring lite to the conversion lens adapter.

6

Choose shooting mode [

G

],

[

M

], [

B

], or [

D

].

z z these modes. In other modes, the flash is adjusted and fired automatically, as needed.

7

Set the white balance to [

h

]

(

=

74

).

8

Enter [

e

] mode (

=

78

).

9

Set [ND Filter] to [On] (

=

73

).

10

Configure the external flash.

z z

(

= 169

) to adjust the settings.

Keep cords (from the macro ring lite or the off-camera shoe cord) away from flash heads.

When using a tripod, adjust the position of the legs to prevent the flash heads from coming into contact with the legs.

Use the screen to compose shots, because the viewfinder cannot be used with these accessories attached.

Macro Twin Lite MT-24EX

This optional flash unit enables many styles of macro flash photography.

Requires the Conversion Lens Adapter LA-DC58L, Off-Camera Shoe Cord

OC-E3, and Bracket BKT-DC1 (all sold separately) for attachment to the camera.

1

Remove the ring and attach the back section of the conversion lens adapter.

z z

MR-14EX” (

= 170 ) to remove the ring,

and then attach the back section of the conversion lens adapter.

2

Attach the off-camera shoe cord to the bracket.

z z of the bracket. Align the bracket screw with the tripod socket of the off-camera shoe cord, and then tighten the screw to secure it.

3

Attach the bracket to the camera.

z z end of the bracket. Align the bracket screw with the tripod socket on the bottom of the camera, and then tighten the screw to secure it.

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

171

4

Attach the off-camera shoe cord to the camera.

z z of the off-camera shoe cord to the hot shoe on top of the camera.

5

Attach the controller to the offcamera shoe cord.

z z lite to the flash connection component of the off-camera shoe cord.

6

Attach the flash unit to the

conversion lens adapter.

z z mount ( ). Press the release button on the top of the ring in and attach the ring to the conversion lens adapter ( ).

7

Configure the external flash and

settings on the camera.

z z

MR-14EX” ( = 171

) to configure the settings.

Keep cords (from the macro twin lite or the off-camera shoe cord) away from flash heads.

When using a tripod, adjust the position of the legs to prevent the flash heads from coming into contact with the legs or bracket.

Use the screen to compose shots, because the viewfinder cannot be used with these accessories attached.

Still Images

Camera Settings Available with an External Flash

(Sold Separately)

The following items are available in [ G ], [ M ], [ B ], or [ D ] mode. In other shooting modes, only [Red-Eye Corr.] and [Red-Eye Lamp] can be configured. (With autoflash control, the flash always fires.) However, external flash units do not fire in modes that the built-in flash does not fire (

= 193

).

Item

Flash Mode

Flash Exp. Comp*

3

Flash Output*

4

Shutter Sync.

Slow Synchro

Wireless Func.*

6

Red-Eye Corr.

Red-Eye Lamp

Safety FE*

7

Clear Flash Settings*

8

Options

Auto*

1

Manual* 2

–3 to +3

1/128*

5

to 1/1 (in 1/3-stop increments)

1st-curtain/2nd-curtain/Hi-speed

On

Off

On/Off

On/Off

On/Off

On

Off O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

Shooting Mode

G M B D

O O O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

172

*1 E-TTL mode is used for the flash.

*2 M mode is used for the flash.

In [

D

] shooting mode, E-TTL mode is also available for the flash. In this case, when the flash fires, flash exposure compensation set on the flash is applied to the flash output level set on the camera.

*3 Can be configured only when [Flash Mode] is [Auto] and flash exposure compensation set on the flash is [+0]. When you adjust flash exposure compensation on 600EX-RT, 600EX, 580EX II, or 430EX II Speedlites, the camera display will be updated accordingly.

*4 Can be configured when [Flash Mode] is [Manual]. Linked to settings on the flash unit.

*5 1/64 for Speedlite 430EX II/430EX/320EX/270EX II/270EX, Macro Ring Lite

MR-14EX, and Macro Twin Lite MT-24EX.

*6 For options other than On/Off, configure the setting on the flash unit itself. Not available with Speedlite 430EX II/320EX/270EX II/270EX, Macro Ring Lite MR-14EX, or Macro Twin Lite MT-24EX. When this item is set to [On], [Shutter Sync.] cannot be set to [2nd-curtain]. (If [Shutter Sync.] is set to [2nd-curtain], it will be changed to

[1st-curtain].)

*7 Can only be configured when [Flash Mode] is [Auto].

*8 Restores all default settings. You can also restore defaults for [Slow Synchro], [Safety

FE], [Red-Eye Corr.], and [Red-Eye Lamp] by using [Reset All] on the [

3

] tab on the camera (

= 157

).

Flash settings in [ ] shooting mode can be configured just as they are in [ G ] mode.

In [ ] shooting mode, icons representing Smiling, Sleeping, Babies

(Smiling), Babies (Sleeping), and Children shooting scenes determined by the camera are not displayed, and the camera does not shoot continuously

(

=

34

).

Using the Software

The software available for download from the Canon website is introduced below, with instructions for installation and saving images to a computer.

Software

After downloading the software from the Canon website and installing it, you can do the following things on your computer.

CameraWindow

z z

ImageBrowser EX

z z z z

Digital Photo Professional

z z

Internet access is required, and any ISP account charges and access fees must be paid separately.

Software Instruction Manual

Refer to the instruction manual when using the software. The manual can be accessed from the help system of software (some software excluded).

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

173

Computer Connections via a Cable

Checking Your Computer Environment

The software can be used on the following computers. For detailed system requirements and compatibility information, including support in new operating systems, visit the Canon website.

Operating

System*

Windows

Windows 8

Windows 7 SP1

Windows Vista SP2

Windows XP SP3

Macintosh

Mac OS X 10.6

Mac OS X 10.7

Mac OS X 10.8

* When sending images to a computer via Wi-Fi, check the system requirements in

“Checking Your Computer Environment” ( = 131 ).

Check the Canon website for the latest system requirements, including supported OS versions.

Installing the Software

For software installation instructions, see “Installing the Software” (

=

131 ).

Saving Images to a Computer

Windows 7 and Mac OS X 10.6 are used here for the sake of illustration.

For other functions, refer to the help system of the relevant software (some software excluded).

1

Connect the camera to the computer.

z z cover ( ). With the smaller plug of the

USB cable in the orientation shown, insert the plug fully into the camera terminal ( ).

z z in the computer’s USB port. For details about USB connections on the computer, refer to the computer user manual.

2

Turn the camera on to access

CameraWindow.

z z 1

> button to turn the camera z on.

On a Macintosh computer,

CameraWindow is displayed when a connection is established between the camera and computer.

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

174

CameraWindow z z below.

z z ] link to modify the program.

z z

Camera] and then click [OK].

z z ].

3

Save the images to the computer.

z z then click [Import Untransferred Images].

z z folder on the computer, in separate folders named by date.

z z

CameraWindow, press the < 1 > button to turn the camera off, and unplug the cable.

z z computer, refer to “Software Instruction

Manual” ( = 173

).

In Windows 7, if the screen in step 2 is not displayed, click the [ ] icon in the taskbar.

To start CameraWindow in Windows Vista or XP, click [Downloads Images

From Canon Camera] on the screen displayed when you turn the camera on in step 2. If CameraWindow is not displayed, click the [Start] menu and choose

[All Programs] ► [Canon Utilities] ► [CameraWindow] ► [CameraWindow].

On a Macintosh computer, if CameraWindow is not displayed after step 2, click the [CameraWindow] icon in the Dock (the bar at the bottom of the desktop).

Although you can save images to a computer simply by connecting your camera to the computer without using the software, the following limitations apply.

- It may take a few minutes after you connect the camera to the computer until camera images are accessible.

- Images shot in vertical orientation may be saved in horizontal orientation.

- RAW images (or JPEG images recorded with RAW images) may not be saved.

- Image protection settings may be cleared from images saved to a computer.

- Some problems may occur when saving images or image information, depending on the operating system version, the software in use, or image file sizes.

- Some functions provided by the software may not be available, such as movie editing.

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

175

Still Images Movies

Printing Images

Your shots can easily be printed by connecting the camera to a printer. On the camera, you can specify images to set up batch printing, prepare orders for photo development services, and prepare orders or print images for photobooks.

A Canon SELPHY CP series compact photo printer is used here for the sake of illustration. Screens displayed and available functions vary by printer. Also refer to the printer manual for additional information.

Still Images

Easy Print

Easily print your shots by connecting the camera to a PictBridge-compatible printer (sold separately) with the USB cable.

1

Make sure the camera and printer are off.

2

Connect the camera to the printer.

z z cable plug in the orientation shown, insert the plug fully into the camera terminal.

z z printer. For other connection details, refer to the printer manual.

3

Turn the printer on.

4

Turn the camera on.

z z 1

> button to turn the camera on.

5

Choose an image.

z z q >< r > buttons or turn the

<

7

> dial to choose an image.

6

Access the printing screen.

z z m > button.

7

Print the image.

z z o >< p > buttons or turn the

< 7 > dial to choose [Print], and then press the < m > button.

z z z z procedures starting from step 5 after printing is finished.

z z camera and printer off and disconnect the cable.

For Canon-brand PictBridge-compatible printers (sold separately), see

“Printers” ( = 162 ).

RAW images cannot be printed.

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

176

Still Images

Configuring Print Settings

1

Access the printing screen.

z z

(

= 176

) to access the screen at left.

2

Configure the settings.

z z o >< p > buttons or turn the <

7

> dial to choose an item, and then choose an option by pressing the

< q >< r > buttons.

Cropping

Paper

Settings

Default

Date

File No.

Both

Matches current printer settings.

Prints images with the date added.

Prints images with the file number added.

Prints images with both the date and file number added.

Off

Default

Off

Matches current printer settings.

On

Uses information from the time of shooting to print under optimal settings.

Red-Eye 1 Corrects red-eye.

No. of Copies Choose the number of copies to print.

Specify a desired image area to print (

=

177

).

Specify the paper size, layout, and other details

(

=

178 ).

Still Images

Cropping Images before Printing

By cropping images before printing, you can print a desired image area instead of the entire image.

1

Choose [Cropping].

z z

Settings” (

= 177

) to access the printing screen, choose [Cropping] and press the

< m > button.

z z indicating the image area to print.

2

Adjust the cropping frame as needed.

z z z lever.

z

< o >< p >< q >< r > buttons.

z z 7

> dial.

z z m > button.

3

Print the image.

z z

=

176

) to print.

Cropping may not be possible at small image sizes, or at some aspect ratios.

Dates may not be printed correctly if you crop images shot with

[Date Stamp ] selected.

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

177

Still Images

Choosing Paper Size and Layout before Printing

1

Choose [Paper Settings].

z z

Settings” (

=

177 ) to access the printing

screen, choose [Paper Settings] and press the < m > button.

2

Choose a paper size.

z z o >< p > buttons or turn the

<

7

> dial to choose an option, and then press the < m > button.

3

Choose a type of paper.

z z o >< p > buttons or turn the

< 7 > dial to choose an option, and then press the < m

> button.

4

Choose a layout.

z z o

>< p

> buttons or turn the z

< 7 > dial to choose an option.

When choosing [N-up], press the

< q >< r > buttons to specify the number of images per sheet.

z z m > button.

5

Print the image.

Available Layout Options

Default

Bordered

Borderless

N-up

ID Photo

Fixed Size

Matches current printer settings.

Prints with blank space around the image.

Borderless, edge-to-edge printing.

Choose how many images to print per sheet.

Prints images for identification purposes.

Only available for images with a resolution of L and an aspect ratio of

4:3.

Choose the print size.

Choose from 3.5 x 5 in., postcard, or wide-format prints.

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

178

Still Images

Printing ID Photos

1

Choose [ID Photo].

z z

Paper Size and Layout before Printing”

(

= 178

), choose [ID Photo] and press the < m > button.

2

Choose the long and short side length.

z z o

>< p

> buttons or turn the

< 7 > dial to choose an item. Choose the length by pressing the < q >< r > buttons, and then press the < m > button.

3

Choose the printing area.

z z

Printing” (

= 177

) to choose the printing area.

4

Print the image.

Movies

Printing Movie Scenes

1

Access the printing screen.

z z

( = 176 ) to choose a movie. The screen

at left is displayed.

z z q >< r > buttons or turn the

< 7 > dial to choose [ c ], and then press the < m

> button. The screen at left is displayed.

2

Choose a printing method.

z z o >< p > buttons or turn the < 7 > dial to choose [ ], and then press the < q >< r > buttons to choose the printing method.

3

Print the image.

Movie Printing Options

Single

Sequence

Prints the current scene as a still image.

Prints a series of scenes, a certain interval apart, on a single sheet of paper. You can also print the folder number, file number, and elapsed time for the frame by setting [Caption] to [On].

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

To cancel printing in progress, press the < m > button.

[ID Photo] and [Sequence] cannot be chosen on Canon-brand PictBridgecompatible printers from CP720/CP730 and earlier models.

179

Adding Images to the Print List (DPOF)

Still Images

Batch printing ( = 182

) and ordering prints from a photo development service can be set up on the camera. Choose up to 998 images on a memory card and configure relevant settings, such as the number of copies, as follows. The printing information you prepare this way will conform to

DPOF (Digital Print Order Format) standards.

RAW images cannot be included in print list.

Still Images

Configuring Print Settings

Specify the printing format, whether to add the date or file number, and other settings as follows. These settings apply to all images in the print list.

z z n > button, and then choose [Print Settings] on the [ 2 ] tab.

Choose and configure items as desired

(

=

25

).

Print Type

Date

File No.

Clear DPOF data

Standard One image is printed per sheet.

Index Smaller versions of multiple images are printed per sheet.

Both

On

Both standard and index formats are printed.

Images are printed with the shooting date.

Off

On

Off

On

Off

Images are printed with the file number.

All image print list settings are cleared after printing.

Not all of your DPOF settings may be applied in printing by the printer or photo development service, in some cases.

[ ] may be displayed on the camera to warn you that the memory card has print settings that were configured on another camera.

Changing the print settings using this camera may overwrite all previous settings.

Setting [Date] to [On] may cause some printers to print the date twice.

Specifying [Index] will prevent you from choosing [On] for both [Date] and [File

No.] at the same time.

Index printing is not available on some Canon-brand PictBridge-compatible printers (sold separately).

The date is printed in a format matching setting details in [Date/Time] on the

[ 3 ] tab (

= 14 ).

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

180

Still Images

Setting Up Printing for Individual Images

1

Choose [Select Images & Qty.].

z z n > button, choose

[Select Images & Qty.] on the [

2

] tab, and then press the < m > button.

2

Choose an image.

z z q >< r > buttons or turn the

< 7 > dial to choose an image, and then press the < m

> button.

z z z copies.

z it is labeled with a [ ] icon. To cancel index printing for the image, press the

< m > button again. [ ] is no longer displayed.

3

Specify the number of prints.

z z o >< p > buttons or turn the

<

7

> dial to specify the number of prints

(up to 99).

z z specify the number of prints, repeat steps

2 – 3.

z z index prints. You can only choose which images to print, by following step 2.

z z n > button to return to the menu screen.

Still Images

Setting Up Printing for a Range of Images

z z for Individual Images” (

=

181 ), choose

[Select Range] and press the < m > button.

z z

( = 112

) to specify images.

z z o >< p > buttons to choose

[Order], and then press the < m > button.

Still Images

Setting Up Printing for All Images

z z for Individual Images” (

=

181 ), choose

[Select All Images] and press the < m > button.

z z q >< r > buttons or turn the

< 7 > dial to choose [OK], and then press the < m > button.

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

181

Still Images

Clearing All Images from the Print List

z z

for Individual Images” ( = 181

), choose

[Clear All Selections] and press the < m > button.

z z q >< r > buttons or turn the

<

7

> dial to choose [OK], and then press the < m > button.

Still Images

Printing Images Added to the Print List (DPOF)

z z

print list ( = 180

181 ), the screen

at left is displayed after you connect the camera to a PictBridge-compatible printer. Press the < o

>< p

> buttons to choose [Print now], and then simply press the < m > button to print the images in the print list.

z z stop will be resumed from the next image.

Still Images

Adding Images to a Photobook

Photobooks can be set up on the camera by choosing up to 998 images on a memory card and importing them into the software on your computer, where they are stored in their own folder. This is convenient when ordering printed photobooks online or printing photobooks with your own printer.

Choosing a Selection Method

z z n

> button, choose

[Photobook Set-up] on the [ 1 ] tab, and then choose how you will select images.

[ ] may be displayed on the camera to warn you that the memory card has print settings that were configured on another camera.

Changing the print settings using this camera may overwrite all previous settings.

After importing images to your computer, also refer to “Software Instruction

Manual” (

= 173 ) and the printer manual for further information.

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

182

Still Images

Adding Images Individually

1

Choose [Select].

z z

a Selection Method” (

=

182 ), choose

[Select] and press the < m > button.

2

Choose an image.

z z q >< r > buttons or turn the

< 7 > dial to choose an image, and then press the < m

> button.

z z z z press the < m > button again. [ ] is no longer displayed.

z z z images.

z n to return to the menu screen.

> button

Still Images

Adding All Images to a Photobook

z z

a Selection Method” ( = 182 ), choose

[Select All Images] and press the < m > button.

z z q >< r > buttons or turn the

<

7

> dial to choose [OK], and then press the < m > button.

Still Images

Removing All Images from a Photobook

z z

a Selection Method” (

=

182 ), choose

[Clear All Selections] and press the < m > button.

z z q >< r > buttons or turn the

< 7 > dial to choose [OK], and then press the < m > button.

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

183

10

Appendix

Helpful information when using the camera

Troubleshooting .............................................

185

On-Screen Messages .....................................

188

On-Screen Information ..................................

191

Shooting (Information Display) ............................

191

Playback (Detailed Information Display) .............

192

Functions and Menu Tables ..........................

193

Functions Available in Each Shooting Mode .......

193

FUNC. Menu .......................................................

195

4 Shooting Tab Menu........................................

198

3 Set Up Tab Menu ...........................................

202

My Menu Tab Menu .......................................

202

1 Playback Tab Menu .......................................

202

2 Print Tab Menu ...............................................

202

Handling Precautions ....................................

203

Specifications .................................................

203

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

184

Troubleshooting

If you think there is a problem with the camera, first check the following.

If the items below do not solve your problem, contact a Canon Customer

Support Help Desk.

Power

Nothing happens when the power button is pressed.

Confirm that the battery pack is charged ( = 12

).

Confirm that the battery pack is inserted facing the correct way ( = 13

).

Confirm that the memory card/battery cover is fully closed (

= 14 ).

Dirty battery terminals reduce battery performance. Try cleaning the terminals with a cotton swab and reinserting the battery pack a few times.

The battery pack runs out of power quickly.

Battery performance decreases at low temperatures. Try warming the battery pack a little by putting it in your pocket, for example, ensuring that the terminals do not touch any metal objects.

If these measures do not help and the battery pack still runs out of power soon after charging, it has reached the end of its life. Purchase a new battery pack.

The lens is not retracted.

Do not open the memory card/battery cover while the camera is on. Close the cover,

turn the camera on, and then turn it off again ( = 14

).

The battery pack is swollen.

Battery swelling is normal and does not pose any safety concerns. However, if battery swelling prevents the battery pack from fitting in the camera, contact a Canon

Customer Support Help Desk.

Display on a TV

Camera images look distorted or not displayed on a TV (

=

165 ).

Shooting

Cannot shoot.

In Playback mode (

=

101 ), press the shutter button halfway (

=

22

).

Nothing is displayed (

=

32 ).

Strange display on the screen under low light (

=

23 ).

Strange display on the screen when shooting.

Note that the following display problems are not recorded in still images but are recorded in movies.

The screen may flicker and horizontal banding may appear under fluorescent or LED lighting.

No date stamp is added to images.

Configure the [Date Stamp

] setting (

=

38 ). Note that date stamps are not

added to images automatically, merely because you have configured the [Date/Time]

setting (

=

14 ).

Date stamps are not added in shooting modes (

=

201

) in which this setting cannot be configured (

=

38 ).

[

h

] flashes on the screen when the shutter button is pressed, and

shooting is not possible (

=

32

).

[ ] is displayed when the shutter button is pressed halfway (

=

32

).

Set [IS Mode] to [Continuous] ( = 89 ).

Raise the flash and set the flash mode to [ h

] ( = 85

).

Increase the ISO speed ( = 70

).

Mount the camera on a tripod or take other measures to keep it still. In this case, you

should set [IS Mode] to [Off] ( = 89

).

Shots are out of focus.

Press the shutter button halfway to focus on subjects before pressing it all the way

down to shoot ( = 22

).

Make sure subjects are within focusing range (

= 205

).

Set [AF-assist Beam] to [On] ( = 48

).

Confirm that unneeded functions such as macro are deactivated.

Try shooting with focus lock or AF lock ( = 81

, 85

).

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

185

No AF frames are displayed and the camera does not focus when the shutter button is pressed halfway.

To have AF frames displayed and the camera focus correctly, try composing the shot with higher-contrast subject areas centered before you press the shutter button halfway. Otherwise, try pressing the shutter button halfway repeatedly.

Subjects in shots look too dark.

Raise the flash and set the flash mode to [ h ] (

= 85 ).

Adjust brightness by using exposure compensation ( = 68

).

Adjust contrast by using i-Contrast (

= 72 ,

120

).

Use AE lock or spot metering (

= 69 ).

Subjects look too bright, highlights are washed-out.

Lower the flash and set the flash mode to [ !

] (

= 29 ).

Adjust brightness by using exposure compensation ( = 68

).

Use AE lock or spot metering (

= 69 ).

Reduce the lighting on subjects.

Shots look too dark despite the flash firing (

=

32

).

Shoot within flash range ( = 205 ).

Adjust brightness by using flash exposure compensation or changing the flash output

level ( = 86

,

94

).

Increase the ISO speed (

= 70 ).

Subjects in flash shots look too bright, highlights are washed-out.

Shoot within flash range ( = 205 ).

Lower the flash and set the flash mode to [ !

] (

= 29 ).

Adjust brightness by using flash exposure compensation or changing the flash output

level ( = 86

,

94

).

White dots or similar image artifacts appear in flash shots.

This is caused by light from the flash reflecting off dust or airborne particles.

Shots look grainy.

Lower the ISO speed (

= 70 ).

High ISO speeds in some shooting modes may cause grainy images (

= 53

).

Subjects are affected by red-eye (

=

45

).

Set [Red-Eye Lamp] to [On] ( = 49

) to activate the red-eye reduction lamp

(

= 3

) in flash shots. For best results, have subjects look at the red-eye reduction lamp. Also try increasing the lighting in indoor scenes and shooting at closer range.

Edit images using red-eye correction (

= 121

).

Recording to the memory card takes too long, or continuous shooting is slower.

Use the camera to perform low-level formatting of the memory card ( = 154

).

Shooting settings or FUNC. menu settings are not available.

Available setting items vary by shooting mode. Refer to “Functions Available in Each

Shooting Mode”, “FUNC. Menu”, and “Shooting Tab Menu” ( = 193

– 201

).

The Babies or Children icon does not display.

The Babies and Children icons will not display if the birthday is not set in face information (

= 39 ). If the icons still do not display even when you set the birthday, re-register face information ( = 39

), or make sure that the date/time are set correctly (

= 151 ).

Cannot shoot planetarium stars well in [ ] mode.

Shoot actual starry skies instead.

Shooting Movies

The elapsed time shown is incorrect, or recording is interrupted.

Use the camera to format the memory card, or switch to a card that supports highspeed recording. Note that even if the elapsed time display is incorrect, the length

of movies on the memory card corresponds to the actual recording time ( = 153 ,

205 ).

[ ] is displayed and shooting stops automatically.

The camera’s internal memory buffer filled up as the camera could not record to the memory card quickly enough. Try one of the following measures.

Use the camera to perform low-level formatting of the memory card ( = 154

).

Lower the image quality (

= 46 ).

Switch to a memory card that supports high-speed recording ( = 205 ).

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

186

Zooming is not possible.

Zooming is not possible in [ ] mode (

= 62

).

Zooming is not possible when shooting movies in [ ] (

= 57 ) and [

] ( = 66

) modes.

Subjects look distorted.

Subjects that pass in front of the camera quickly may look distorted. This is not a malfunction.

Playback

Playback is not possible.

Image or movie playback may not be possible if a computer is used to rename files or

alter the folder structure. Refer to “Software Instruction Manual” ( = 173 ) for details

on folder structure and file names.

Playback stops, or audio skips.

Switch to a memory card that you have performed low-level formatting on with the camera (

= 154

).

There may be brief interruptions when playing movies copied to memory cards that have slow read speeds.

When movies are played on a computer, frames may be dropped and audio may skip if computer performance is inadequate.

Sound is not played during movies.

Adjust the volume (

= 102

) if you have activated [Mute] (

= 150 ) or the sound in

the movie is faint.

No sound is played for movies shot in [ ] (

= 57

), [ ] (

= 63 ), or [

] ( = 66 )

mode because audio is not recorded in these modes.

Memory Card

The memory card is not recognized.

Restart the camera, with the memory card in it (

= 21 ).

Computer

Cannot transfer images to a computer.

When attempting to transfer images to the computer via a cable, try reducing the transfer speed as follows.

Press the <

1

> button to enter Playback mode. Hold the < n

> button down as you press the < o

> and < m

> buttons at the same time. On the next screen, press the < q

>< r

> buttons to choose [B], and then press the < m

> button.

Wi-Fi

Cannot access the Wi-Fi menu by pressing the < > button.

The Wi-Fi menu is not available in Shooting mode. Switch to Playback mode and try again.

The Wi-Fi menu cannot be accessed during group playback or filtered image display according to specified conditions. Cancel group or filtered image playback.

The Wi-Fi menu cannot be accessed while the camera is connected to a printer, computer, or TV via a cable. Disconnect the cable.

Cannot add a device/destination.

A total of 20 items of connection information can be added to the camera. Erase unneeded connection information from the camera first, and then add new devices/ destinations (

= 147

).

Use a computer or smartphone to register Web services ( = 127 ).

To add a smartphone, first install the dedicated application CameraWindow on your

smartphone ( = 130

).

To add a computer, first install the CameraWindow application on your computer. Also

check your computer and Wi-Fi environment and settings ( = 131 ,

133

,

134 ).

Do not use the camera near sources of Wi-Fi signal interference, such as microwave ovens, Bluetooth devices, or other equipment operating on the 2.4 GHz band.

Bring the camera closer to the other device you are trying to connect to (such as the access point), and make sure there are no objects between the devices.

Cannot connect to the access point.

Confirm that the access point channel is set to a channel supported by the camera

(

= 204

). Note that instead of auto channel assignment, it is advisable to specify a supported channel manually.

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

187

Cannot send images.

The destination device has insufficient storage space. Increase the storage space on the destination device and resend the images.

The write-protect tab of the memory card in the destination camera is set to the locked position. Slide the write-protect tab to the unlocked position.

RAW images cannot be sent. In [ ] mode, only the JPEG images are sent.

Images cannot be sent to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY or other Web services if you move or rename image files or folders on the computer that received images sent

using Image Sync via an access point ( = 145 ). Before moving or renaming these

image files or folders on the computer, make sure the images have already been sent to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY or other Web services.

Cannot resize images for sending.

Images cannot be resized to be bigger than the resolution setting of their original size.

Movies cannot be resized.

Images take a long time to send./The wireless connection is disrupted.

Multiple images may take a long time to send. Try resizing the image to [ ] or [ ] to reduce sending time (

= 142

).

Movies may take a long time to send.

Do not use the camera near sources of Wi-Fi signal interference, such as microwave ovens, Bluetooth devices, or other equipment operating on the 2.4 GHz band. Note that images may take a long time to send even when [ ] is displayed.

Bring the camera closer to the other device you are trying to connect to (such as the access point), and make sure there are no objects between the devices.

When sending images to a computer from a memory card with a large amount of images (approximately 1,000), the connection may be disrupted. Import any necessary images to a computer, and then reduce the number of images on the memory card by erasing unnecessary images.

Want to erase Wi-Fi connection information before disposing of the camera or giving it to someone else.

Reset the Wi-Fi settings (

= 148

).

On-Screen Messages

If an error message is displayed, respond as follows.

No memory card

The memory card may be inserted facing the wrong way. Reinsert the memory card

facing the correct way ( = 13

).

Memory card locked

The write-protect tab of the memory card is set to the locked position. Switch the write-protect tab to the unlocked position (

=

13 ).

Cannot record!

Shooting was attempted without a memory card in the camera. To shoot, insert a

memory card facing the correct way ( = 13

).

Memory card error (

=

154

)

If the same error message is displayed even after you have formatted a supported memory card (

= 2

) and have inserted it facing the correct way (

= 13 ), contact

a Canon Customer Support Help Desk.

Insufficient space on card

There is not enough free space on the memory card to shoot ( = 29

,

51 ,

67 ,

91

)

or edit images ( = 118 –

121 ). Either erase unneeded images (

= 114 ) or insert a

memory card with enough free space ( = 13

).

Charge the battery (

=

12

)

No Image.

The memory card does not contain any images that can be displayed.

Protected! (

=

111

)

Unidentified Image/Incompatible JPEG/Image too large./Cannot play back MOV

Unsupported or corrupt images cannot be displayed.

It may not be possible to display images that were edited or renamed on a computer, or images shot with another camera.

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

188

Cannot magnify!/Cannot play back this content in Smart Shuffle/

Cannot rotate/Cannot modify image/Cannot modify/Cannot assign to category/Unselectable image./No identification information

The following functions may be unavailable for images that were renamed or already edited on a computer, or images shot with another camera. Note that starred (*) functions are not available for movies.

Edit ID Info* ( = 108

– 109

), Magnify* (

= 109

), Smart Shuffle* ( = 110

), Rotate

(

= 116 ), Favorites (

= 117 ), Edit* (

= 118

121

), Print List* (

= 180

), and

Photobook Set-up* ( = 182 ).

Grouped images cannot be processed (

= 77

).

Invalid selection range

When specifying a range for image selection (

=

112 ,

115 ,

181

), you attempted to choose an initial image that was after the final image, or vice-versa.

Exceeded selection limit

More than 998 images were selected for Print List (

= 180

) or Photobook Set-up

(

= 182 ). Choose 998 images or less.

Print List ( = 180

) or Photobook Set-up (

= 182

) settings could not be saved correctly. Reduce the number of selected images and try again.

You attempted to choose more than 500 images in Protect ( = 111

), Erase

(

= 114

), Favorites (

= 117

), Print List ( = 180

), or Photobook Set-up ( = 182 ).

Communication error

An excessive amount of images (approx. 1,000) on the memory card prevented printing or image transfer to a computer. To transfer the images, use a commercially available USB card reader. To print, insert the memory card directly into the printer card slot.

Naming error!

The folder could not be created or images could not be recorded, because the highest supported folder number (999) for storing images on the card has been reached and the highest supported image number (9999) for images in folders has been reached.

On the [ 3

] tab, change [File Numbering] to [Auto Reset] ( = 154 ), or format the

memory card ( = 153

).

Lens Error

This error may occur if the lens is held while it is moving, or when the camera is used in dusty or sandy locations.

Frequent display of this error message may indicate camera damage. In this case, contact a Canon Customer Support Help Desk.

A camera error was detected (

error number

)

If this error message is displayed immediately after a shot, the image may not have been saved. Switch to Playback mode to check for the image.

Frequent display of this error message may indicate camera damage. In this case, write down the error number (

Exx

) and contact a Canon Customer Support Help

Desk.

File Error

Correct printing ( = 176 ) may not be possible for photos from other cameras or

images that have been altered using computer software, even if the camera is connected to the printer.

Print error

Check the paper size setting (

=

178

). If this error message is displayed when the setting is correct, restart the printer and complete the setting on the camera again.

Ink absorber full

Contact a Canon Customer Support Help Desk to request assistance with ink absorber replacement.

Wi-Fi

Connection failed

No access points were recognized. Check the access point settings (

= 134

).

A device could not be found. Turn the camera off and on again, and retry the connection.

Check the device you want to connect to and make sure it is ready for connection.

Cannot determine access point

The WPS buttons on numerous access points were pressed simultaneously. Try reconnecting again.

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

189

No access points found

Check to make sure that the access point is turned on.

When connecting to an access point manually, make sure that you entered the correct SSID.

Incorrect password/Incorrect Wi-Fi security settings

Check the access point security settings (

= 134 ).

IP address conflict

Reset the IP address so that it does not conflict with another.

Disconnected/Receiving failed/Sending failed

You may be in an environment where Wi-Fi signals are obstructed.

Avoid using the camera’s Wi-Fi function around microwave ovens, Bluetooth devices, and other devices that operate on the 2.4 GHz band.

Bring the camera closer to the other device you are trying to connect to (such as the access point), and make sure there are no objects between the devices.

Check the connected device to make sure it is not experiencing errors.

Sending failed

Memory card error

If the same error message is displayed even when you have inserted a formatted memory card facing the correct way, contact a Canon Customer Support Help Desk.

Receiving failed

Insufficient space on card

There is not enough free space on the memory card in the target camera to receive images. Erase images to create space on the memory card, or insert a memory card with sufficient space.

Receiving failed

Memory card locked

The write-protect tab of the memory card in the camera to receive the images is set to the locked position. Slide the write-protect tab to the unlocked position.

Receiving failed

Naming error!

When the highest folder number (999), and the highest image number (9999) have been reached on the receiving camera, images cannot be received.

Insufficient space on server

Delete unnecessary images uploaded to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY to create space.

Save the images sent via Image Sync (

= 145

) to your computer.

Check network settings

Check to make sure your computer can connect to the Internet with the current network settings.

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

190

On-Screen Information

Shooting (Information Display)

Shooting mode

( = 193

), Scene

icon ( = 33 )

Flash mode

( = 85 ), LED light

(

=

169

)

Red-eye correction

( = 45 )

Flash exposure compensation /

Flash output level

(

=

86 ,

94 )

Metering method

(

= 69

), ND filter

(

= 73

), Shadow

correction ( = 73 )

Drive mode

(

=

76

), AEB

shooting ( = 72 ),

Focus bracketing

(

= 80

)

White balance

(

=

74

), Mercury lamp correction

(

= 46

)

My Colors (

=

75

)

Eco mode (

=

152

)

Camera shake

warning ( = 32 )

Self-timer (

= 36 )

IS mode icon

(

= 34

)

Battery level

(

= 191 )

Still image compression

(

= 89

),

Resolution (

= 45 )

Recordable shots

(

=

204 )

Movie resolution

(

= 46

)

Digital zoom magnification

(

= 35

), Digital tele-converter

(

= 80

)

Remaining time

(

= 205 )

Histogram ( = 103

)

Focusing range

( = 53

, 78

),

Manual focus (

=

78

),

AF lock ( = 85 )

Blink detection

(

= 48

)

AF frame ( = 81 ),

Spot AE point frame

(

= 69 )

Date stamp

(

= 38 )

DR correction

(

= 73 )

AE lock ( = 69 ),

FE lock (

=

87

)

Shutter speed

(

= 92 ,

93

)

Electronic level

(

= 47 )

Aperture value

(

= 93 )

Exposure compensation level

(

= 68 )

ISO speed ( = 70 )

Grid lines (

= 95

)

Hybrid Auto mode

(

=

31 )

Zoom bar (

=

29 )

Wind filter (

=

32 )

Time zone (

=

151

)

Image stabilization

( = 89 )

MF indicator

( = 78 )

Exposure shift bar

( = 65 )

Exposure level

(

=

93 )

Exposure compensation bar

( = 68 )

Battery Level

An on-screen icon or message indicates the battery charge level.

Display Details

Sufficient charge

Slightly depleted, but sufficient

(Blinking red)

[Charge the battery]

Nearly depleted—charge the battery pack soon

Depleted—charge the battery pack immediately

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

191

Playback (Detailed Information Display)

Movies ( = 29 ,

102 )

Current image no. /

Total no. of images

Histogram (

=

103 )

Battery level

( = 191

)

Wi-Fi signal strength

( = 142

)

Image Sync (

= 145

)

Image editing

( = 118

121 ),

Movie compression

( = 123

)

Favorites (

= 117 )

Protection ( = 111

)

Folder number - File number (

= 154 )

Shooting date/time

( = 14 )

Shooting mode

(

=

193

)

Shutter speed

(

=

92 ,

93

)

Aperture value

(

= 93

)

Exposure compensation level

(

= 68

), Exposure shift level (

=

65

)

ISO speed (

=

70 ),

Playback speed

( = 57 )

Metering method

(

= 69 )

Flash output level (

=

94

),

Flash exposure compensation

(

= 86

)

White balance

(

=

74

)

White balance

correction (

=

74 ),

Mercury lamp

correction ( = 46 )

My Colors ( = 75

,

120 )

Focusing range

(

=

53 ,

78

),

Manual focus

(

= 78

)

ND filter ( = 73

)

Red-eye correction

(

= 45

,

121

)

High ISO NR

(

=

71

)

DR correction

(

= 73

)

Shadow correction

(

= 73

)

Group playback

(

=

108 ), Image quality

/ Frame rate (movies)

( = 46

, 66

)

Compression (image

quality) (

=

89 )

/ Resolution

(

= 45 ), Digest

movies (

= 104 ),

RAW (

=

88 ),

MP4 (movies)

Still images:

Resolution (

=

204

)

Movies: Playback

time ( = 205

)

File size

Some information may not be displayed when viewing images on a TV

(

= 163

).

Summary of Movie Control Panel in “Viewing” (

=

102

)

Exit

Play

Slow Motion (To adjust the playback speed, press the < q >< r > buttons or turn the < 7 > dial. No sound is played.)

Skip Backward* or Previous Clip ( = 123 ) (To continue skipping backward,

keep holding down the < m > button.)

Previous Frame (For fast-rewind, keep holding down the < m > button.)

Next Frame (For fast-forward, keep holding down the < m

> button.)

Skip Forward* or Next Clip (

=

123 ) (To continue skipping forward, keep

holding down the < m

> button.)

*

Edit ( = 122 )

c

Erase Clip (displayed when a digest movie is selected ( = 123 ))

Shown when the camera is connected to a PictBridge-compatible printer

(

= 176

).

* Displays the frame approx. 4 sec. before or after the current frame.

During movie playback, you can skip back or forward (or to the previous or next clip) by pressing the < q >< r > buttons.

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

192

Functions and Menu Tables

Functions Available in Each Shooting Mode

Shooting Mode

K E

Function

Exposure Compensation (

= 68

)

ISO Speed ( = 70

)

AUTO

80 – 12800

Flash (

=

85 )

*

*

*

1

1

1

*

*

*

1

1

1

D B M G

– O O O – –

I S P t E

O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O – – –

– O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O

O O O O – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – h

Z

!

Shutter Speed (

=

92

, 93

)

Aperture Value (

= 93 )

Program Shift ( = 69

)

AE Lock (

= 69 )/FE Lock (

= 87 )*

3

AE Lock (Movie)/Exposure Shift ( = 65

)*

4

AF Lock (when assigned to the < > or movie button)

( = 85 )

*

1

*

1

– – – O O O O O O O – – – O O O – – O O O O – O O O O – –

*

1

*

1

O O O O – – O O O O – – – O O O – – O O O O – O O O O – –

*

1

*

1

– O – O *

2

*

2

– – – – – – – *

2

– – – – – – – – – – – – – – –

*

1

*

1

O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O

*

1

*

1

O – O – –

*

1

*

1

O O – – –

O O – O O O –

O O – O O O –

– – – – – – –

O O O O O O –

– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –

– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –

– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –

– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –

– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – O –

O – – – O O O O O O – O O O O O O O O O O O O

Focusing Range (

= 53 ,

78 )

e

8

*

*

1

1

*

*

1

1

O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O

O O O O –

– – – – – – –

O – – – – – – O – O – O O O O O O O O O O O O

– – – – – – – – O – – – – – – – – – – – – – –

*

1

*

1

O O O O –

O – – – O O O O O O – O O O O O – O O O O O O Manual Focus (

= 78 )

*1 Options vary depending on the assigned shooting mode.

*2 Not available, but switches to [ Z ] in some cases.

*3 FE lock not available in [ !

] flash mode.

*4 In modes other than [ E ], AE lock and Exposure shift are only available when shooting movies.

O Available or set automatically. – Not available.

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

193

Shooting Mode

K E

Function

Move AF Frame ( = 81

)

Resize AF Frame ( = 81 )

Face Select ( = 84

)

Set Tracking AF Subject (

= 82 )

Screen Display ( = 23

)

Display Off

Display 1

Display 2

D B M G

*

1

*

1

O O O O –

*

1

*

1

O O O O –

I S P t E

– – – – O O O – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –

O – – – – – – – O O – – O – – O – O O O O O O

O O O O O O O O O O O O – – – – – O – O O – – O O O O O O O O

O O O O O O – O O – – – – – – – O O – – O – – – – – O O O O –

*

1

*

1

O O O O – O O – – – O O O – – O O – – – – – – – – – – – –

*

1

*

1

O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O

*

1

*

1

O O O O O O O – O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O

*1 Options vary depending on the assigned shooting mode.

O Available or set automatically. – Not available.

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

194

FUNC. Menu

Shooting Mode

K E

Function

DR Correction (

= 73

)

D B M G

I S P t E

*

1

*

1

O O O O –

O O O O O O O O – O O O O O O O O O O O O – –

*

1

*

1

– O O O O O – – – – – – – – O – – – – – – – – – – – – – –

*

1

*

1

O O O O –

– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –

Shadow Correct (

=

73 )

*

1

*

1

O O O O –

O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O – –

*

1

*

1

O O O O O O

– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –

White Balance (

=

74 )

S h

*

2

*

2

White Balance Correction (

=

74

)

My Colors (

=

75 )

*

1

*

1

O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O

*

*

*

1

1

1

*

*

*

1

1

1

O O O O –

O O O O –

O O O O –

*

1

*

1

O O O O –

– O O O – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – O –

– O O O – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –

– O O O – – – – O – – – – – – – – – – – – O –

– – – – *

2

*

2

*

2

– *

2

– – – – – – – – – – – – – –

*

3

*

3

*

Bracketing (

= 72 ,

80 )

4

*

1

*

1

O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O

*

1

*

1

O O O O –

– – O O O – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – O –

*

1

*

1

O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O

*

*

1

1

*

*

1

1

– O O O –

O O O O –

– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –

– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –

*1 Options vary depending on the assigned shooting mode.

*2 Advanced settings not available.

*3 White balance is not available.

*4 Set in a range of 1 – 5: contrast, sharpness, color saturation, red, green, blue, and skin tone.

O Available or set automatically. – Not available.

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

195

Shooting Mode

K E

Function

Drive Mode (

= 76 )

D B M G

I S P t E

*

2

*

2

Self-Timer ( = 36

)

*

1

*

1

O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O

*

*

– – – – – – –

1

1

*

*

1

1

O O O O –

O O O O –

O

– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –

O – – – – – – – O O O – O O O O – O O O O – –

– – – – – – – – O O O – O O O O – O O O O – –

] [ $

Self-Timer Settings ( = 37

)

Delay*

3

Shots*

4

Flash Exposure Compensation (

=

86 )

Flash Output Level (

=

94 )

Metering Method (

=

69 )

*

1

*

1

O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O

*

1

*

1

O O O O O O O – – – O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O

*

1

*

1

O O O O O O O – – – O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O

*

1

*

1

O O O O –

*

1

*

1

– O O O –

*

1

*

1

O O O – –

O

O – – – – – – O O O O O O O O O O O O O O – –

– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –

– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –

ND Filter (

=

73

)

*

1

*

1

O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O

*

1

*

1

O O O O –

– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –

*

1

*

1

O O O O –

– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – O O

*

1

*

1

O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O

Still Image Aspect Ratio (

=

44 )

*

1

*

1

O O O O –

*

1

*

1

O O O O –

O O O O O O O O – O O O – – – O – – – O O O – –

O O O O O O O – – O O O – – – – – – – O O O – –

*

1

*

1

O O O O O O O O O O O O – O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O

*

1

*

1

O O O O – O O O O O O O – – O O O – – – – – – – O O O – –

*1 Options vary depending on the assigned shooting mode.

*2 [ ] is set with [ f ], AF lock, or [ t ].

*3 Cannot be set to 0 seconds in modes without selection of the number of shots.

*4 One shot (cannot be modified) in modes without selection of the number of shots.

O Available or set automatically. – Not available.

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

196

Shooting Mode

K E

Function

Image Type (

= 88

)

Resolution (

= 45 )

* 1 * 1

D B M G

O O O O –

I S P t E

– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –

Compression ( = 89

)

*

*

1

1

*

*

1

1

O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O

O O O O – O O O O O – – – – O O O – – – – – – – – – – O O

* 1

* 1

* 1

* 1

O O O O –

– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –

O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O

Movie Quality (

= 46 ,

66 )

*

1

*

1

O O O O O O O O O O O O – O O O O O O O – O O O O O O O –

*

1

*

1

O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O – O O O O O O O –

*

1

*

1

O O O O O

– – – – –

*1 Options vary depending on the assigned shooting mode.

*2 Synchronizes with the aspect ratio setting and is automatically set ( = 57

).

– –

O

O O O O O O – O O O O O O O *

2

O O O O O O O –

– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – O

O Available or set automatically. – Not available.

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

197

4

Shooting Tab Menu

Shooting Mode

K E

Function

AF Frame ( = 81

)

Face AiAF

Tracking AF

FlexiZone/Center*

3

Digital Zoom ( = 35

)

Standard

Off

1.5/2.0x

AF-Point Zoom ( = 47

)

On

Off

Servo AF (

=

83 )

On

Off

Continuous AF (

=

84 )

On

Off

AF-assist Beam (

= 48

)

On

Off

MF-Point Zoom (

= 79 )

Off

2x/4x

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

D B M G

O O O O O

O O O O –

O O O O –

O O O O O

O O O O –

O O O O O

O O O O –

O O O O O

O O O O O

O O O O –

O O O O O

O O O O O

O

*

2

O

O

O

*

O

4

O

O

I S P t E

O O O O – – – O – O – O O – – O O O O O O O O

O – – – – – – – O O – – O – – – – – O O O O –

O – – – O O O – O O O – O O – O – O O O O O O

O O O O – – – – O O O – – – – – – – – – – O –

*

1

*

1

O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O

*

1

*

1

O O O O –

– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –

O O O O – – – – O O – – O – – – – – O O O – –

O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O

O – – – – – – – O O – – O – – – – – O O O – –

O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O

O O O O – – – O O O – O O O O O O O O O O O O

O – – – O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O – –

O O O O – – – O – O – O O O O O O O O O O O O

O – O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O

*

*

1

1

*

*

1

1

O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O

O O O O –

O – – – O O O – O O – – O – – – – – O O O – –

*1 Options vary depending on the assigned shooting mode.

*2 Only available by pressing the < o > button (

= 38 ).

*3 [FlexiZone] in [ G ], [ M ], [ B ], and [ D ] modes, otherwise [Center].

*4 [On] when subject movement is detected.

O Available or set automatically. – Not available.

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

198

Shooting Mode

K E

Function

Safety MF ( = 79

)

On

Off

MF Peaking Settings (

= 79 )

Peaking On/Off

Level

Color

High/Low

Red/Blue/Yellow

Flash Control (

=

45 ,

49 ,

86

,

87

,

94 )

Flash Mode

Auto

Manual

Flash Exp. Comp

Flash Output

Shutter Sync.

Red-Eye Corr.

1st-curtain

2nd-curtain

On

Red-Eye Lamp

Safety FE

Off

On/Off

On

Off

ISO Auto Settings (

= 71 )

Max ISO Speed

Rate of Change

High ISO NR ( = 71

)

Low/Standard/High

Hg Lamp Corr. ( = 46

)

On/Off

Spot AE Point (

= 69 )

Center/AF Point

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

D B M G

O O O O –

O O O O –

O O O O –

O O O O –

I S P t E

O – – – O O O O O O – O O O O O – O O O O O O

*

1

*

1

O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O

*

1

*

1

– O O O O O O O O O – – – O O O – – O O O O – O O O O – –

*

1

*

1

O O O – –

*

1

*

1

– O O O –

*

1

*

1

O O O – –

* 1

* 1

– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –

– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –

– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –

*

1

*

1

O O O O O O O O O O – – – O O O – – O O O O – O O O O – –

*

1

*

1

O O O O – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –

*

1 * 1

* 1 * 1

* 1

*

*

*

1

1

1

O O O O O

O O O O O

O

O

O O O O – – – O – O – – – – – – – – – – – – –

O O O O – – – O O O – – O O O O – O O O O – –

O O O O O O O O O O – – – O – O – – O O O O – O O O O – –

– O O O O O O O O O – – – O O O – – O O O O – O O O O – –

O O O O –

– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –

– O O O –

– O

O O O O –

– – – –

– O –

– – –

*

1

*

1

O O O O –

*1 Options vary depending on the assigned shooting mode.

O

O – – – O O O O O O – O O O O O – O O O O O O

O – – – O O O O O O – O O O O O – O O O O O O

O – – – O O O O O O – O O O O O – O O O O O O

– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –

– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –

– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –

– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –

– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –

O Available or set automatically. – Not available.

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

199

Shooting Mode

K E

Function

Safety Shift (

= 93 )

On

Off

D B M G

I S P t E

*

1

*

1

– O O – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –

*

1

*

1

O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O

Wind Filter ( = 32

)

Auto/Off

Review image after shooting (

= 49 )

Display Time

Off/Quick

2 sec./4 sec./8 sec.

Hold

*

1

*

1

O O O O O O O O O O O O – O O O O O O O – O O O O O O O –

*

1

*

1

O O O O O O O O O O O O – O O O O O O O O O O O O O O – –

*

1

*

1

O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O – –

*

1

*

1

O O O O O O O O O O O O – O O O O O O O O O O O O O O – –

*

1

*

1

O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O – – Display Info

Blink Detection (

= 48 )

On

Off

Off/Detailed

*

1

*

1

O O O O O O O O O O – – – – – O – – O – – – – – – O O – –

*

1

*

1

O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O

Custom Display ( = 95 )

Shooting Info/Grid Lines/Electronic Level/Histogram *

1

*

1

O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O

Night Display ( = 90

)

On/Off

FUNC. Menu Layout (

= 98 )

IS Settings (

= 89 )

IS Mode

Dynamic IS

Off

Continuous

Shoot Only

1

2

*

O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O

*

*

*

*

*

1

1

1

1

1

1

*

*

*

*

*

*

1

1

1

1

1

1

O O O O –

O O O O O

O O O O O

O O O O –

O O O O O

O O O O –

O

O

O

O

– – – – O O O – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –

O O O O O O O – O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O

O O O O – – – O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O

O O O O – – – – O O O O O O O O O O O O O – –

O O O O – – – O O O O O O O – O O O O O O O –

O O O O O O O – O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O

*1 Options vary depending on the assigned shooting mode.

O Available or set automatically. – Not available.

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

200

Shooting Mode

K E

Function

Converter (

= 166 )

None/TC-DC58E

Date Stamp (

= 38 )

Off

Date/Date & Time

Digest Type ( = 31 )

Include Stills/No Stills

Save Stills ( = 64 )

On/Off

Star Emphasis ( = 62

)

On/Off

Face ID Settings (

= 39 )

Set z7 Func. (

= 96 )

Set Shortcut button ( = 97

)

Set button (

= 97

)

Save Settings (

= 99 )

*

*

*

1

1

1

*

*

*

1

1

1

D B M G

O O O O O

O O O O O

O O O O O

– – –

– – –

– O

– –

O

O

O

I S P t E

O O O O – – – O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O

O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O

O O O O – – – – O O O – – – – – – – – – – – –

– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –

– – – – – – O – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –

– – – – – – – – – – – – O – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –

*

1

*

1

O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O

*

1

*

1

O O O O –

– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –

*

1

*

1

O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O

*

1

*

1

O O O O O O O O O O O O – O O O O O O O O O O O O O O – –

O O O O O O –

– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –

*1 Options vary depending on the assigned shooting mode.

- Names of people in shots taken using Face ID ( = 39

) may not be displayed in some modes or with some settings, but they will be recorded in the still images.

O Available or set automatically. – Not available.

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

201

Item

Mute

Volume

Sound Options

Hints & Tips

Date/Time

Time Zone

Lens Retract

Eco Mode

Power Saving

LCD Brightness

Start-up Image

Format

3

Set Up Tab Menu

Ref. Page

= 150

= 150

= 150

= 151

= 14

= 151

= 152

= 152

=

21 ,

152

= 153

= 153

= 153

,

154

My Menu Tab Menu

My Menu settings

Item

Item

File Numbering

Create Folder

Units

Electronic Level

Video System

Ctrl via HDMI

Wi-Fi Settings

Copyright Info

Certification Logo Display

Language

Reset All

Ref. Page

= 154

= 155

= 155

= 155

= 165

= 164

= 124

= 156

=

156

= 16

= 157

Ref. Page

= 100

1

Playback Tab Menu

Item

List/Play Digest Movies

Smart Shuffle

Slideshow

Erase

Protect

Rotate

Favorites

Photobook Set-up i-Contrast

Red-Eye Correction

Cropping

Ref. Page

= 105

= 110

= 110

= 114

= 111

= 116

= 117

= 182

= 120

= 121

=

119

Resize

My Colors

Item

Face ID Info

Transition Effect

Index Effect

Scroll Display

Group Images

Auto Rotate

Resume

Set Shortcut button

2

Print Tab Menu

Item

Print

Select Images & Qty.

Select Range

Ref. Page

= 181

= 181

Item

Select All Images

Clear All Selections

Print Settings

Ref. Page

= 118

= 120

= 105

= 103

= 105

= 103

= 108

= 116

= 103

= 118

Ref. Page

= 181

= 182

= 180

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

202

Handling Precautions

The camera is a high-precision electronic device. Avoid dropping it or subjecting it to strong impact.

Never bring the camera near magnets, motors, or other devices that generate strong electromagnetic fields, which may cause malfunction or erase image data.

If water droplets or dirt adheres to the camera or screen, wipe with a dry soft cloth, such as an eyeglass cloth. Do not rub hard or apply force.

Never use cleaners containing organic solvents to clean the camera or screen.

Use a blower brush to remove dust from the lens. If cleaning is difficult, contact a Canon Customer Support Help Desk.

To prevent condensation from forming on the camera after sudden temperature changes (when the camera is transferred from cold to warm environments), put the camera in an airtight, resealable plastic bag and let it gradually adjust to the temperature before removing it from the bag.

If condensation does form on the camera, stop using it immediately.

Continuing to use the camera in this state may damage it. Remove the battery pack and memory card, and wait until the moisture has evaporated before resuming use.

Before long-term battery storage, use up the battery pack’s remaining charge, remove it from the camera, and store it in a plastic bag or similar container. Storing a partially charged battery pack over extended periods

(about a year) may shorten its life or affect performance.

Specifications

Camera Effective

Pixels (Max.)

Lens Focal Length

Viewfinder

LCD Monitor

File Format

Data Type

Interface

Power Source

Dimensions (Based on CIPA Guidelines)

Weight (Based on

CIPA Guidelines)

Approx. 12.1 million pixels

5x zoom: 6.1 (W) – 30.5 (T) mm

(35mm film equivalent: 28 (W) – 140 (T) mm)

Real-image type optical zoom viewfinder

Dioptric Adjustment Range: –3.0 to +1.0 m

-1

(dpt)

Coverage: Approx. 80%

3.0-type color TFT LCD

Effective Pixels: Approx. 922,000 dots

Design rule for Camera File system, DPOF (version 1.1) compliant

Still Images: Exif 2.3 (JPEG), RAW (CR2 (Canon Original))

Movies: MP4 (Video: H.264; Audio: MPEG2 AAC-LC (stereo))

Hi-speed USB

HDMI output

Analog audio output (stereo)

Analog video output (NTSC/PAL)

Battery Pack NB-10L

AC Adapter Kit ACK-DC80

108.8 x 75.9 x 40.3 mm (4.28 x 2.99 x 1.59 in.)

Approx. 356 g (approx. 12.56 oz.; including the battery pack and memory card)

Approx. 314 g (approx. 11.08 oz.; camera body only)

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

203

Wi-Fi Functions

Standards

Transmission

Methods

Communication

Modes

Supported Channels

Security

IEEE802.11b/g/n*

*2.4 GHz band only

OFDM modulation (IEEE 802.11g/n)

DSSS modulation (IEEE 802.11b)

Infrastructure mode*

1

, Ad hoc mode*

2

*1 Supports Wi-Fi Protected Setup

*2 Wi-Fi Certified IBSS

1 – 11 (PC2035/PC2059) or 1 – 13 (PC2010)

Model numbers indicated in parentheses ( = 210

)

WEP, WPA-PSK (AES/TKIP),

WPA2-PSK (AES/TKIP)

Number of Shots/Recording Time, Playback Time

Number of Shots

Screen On

Screen Off

Eco Mode On

Movie Recording

Time*

1

Continuous

Shooting*

2

Screen On

Screen On

Playback Time

Approx. 360

Approx. 770

Approx. 480

Approx. 1 hour

Approx. 1 hour, 40 minutes

Approx. 7 hours

*1 Time under default camera settings, when normal operations are performed, such as shooting, pausing, turning the camera on and off, and zooming.

*2 Time available when shooting the maximum movie length (until recording stops automatically) repeatedly.

• The number of shots that can be taken is based on measurement guidelines of the

Camera & Imaging Products Association (CIPA).

• Under some shooting conditions, the number of shots and recording time may be less than mentioned above.

• Number of shots/time with a fully charged battery pack.

Number of 4:3 Shots per Memory Card

Recording Pixels

Compression

Ratio

Number of Shots per Memory Card

(Approx. shots)

8 GB 32 GB

1379 5568

(Large)

12M/4000x3000

(Medium 1)

6M/2816x2112

(Medium 2)

2M/1600x1200

(Small)

0.3M/640x480

2192

2431

3721

7442

12927

27291

40937

8850

9814

15020

30040

52176

110150

165225

RAW Images

4000x3000

– 446 1804

• The values in the table are measured according to Canon standards and may change depending on the subject, memory card and camera settings.

• The values in the table are based on 4:3 aspect ratio. If the aspect ratio is changed

(

=

44 ), more images can be shot because the data size per image will be smaller

than with 4:3 images. However, since [ ] 16:9 images have a setting of 1920 x 1080 pixels, their data size will be larger than 4:3 images.

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

204

Recording Time per Memory Card

Image Quality

Recording Time per Memory Card

8 GB 32 GB

30 min. 03 sec.

2 hr. 01 min. 27 sec.

43 min. 29 sec.

2 hr. 55 min. 43 sec.

2 hr. 03 min. 55 sec.

5 hr. 14 min. 34 sec.

8 hr. 20 min. 32 sec.

21 hr. 10 min. 33 sec.

• The values in the table are measured according to Canon standards and may change depending on the subject, memory card and camera settings.

• Recording will automatically stop when the clip file size reaches 4 GB, or when the recording time reaches approximately 29 minutes and 59 seconds when shooting in

[ ], [ ] or [ ], or approximately 1 hour when shooting in [ ].

• Recording may stop even if the maximum clip length has not been reached on some memory cards. SD Speed Class 6 or higher memory cards are recommended.

Flash Range

Maximum wide angle ( j )

Maximum telephoto ( i )

50 cm – 7.0 m (1.6 – 23 ft.)

50 cm – 4.5 m (1.6 – 15 ft.)

Shooting Range

Other modes

– e * f *

8

* Not available in some shooting modes.

1 cm – infinity

(0.4 in. – infinity)

5 cm – infinity

(2.0 in. – infinity)

1 – 50 cm

(0.4 in. – 1.6 ft.)

1 cm – infinity

(0.4 in. – infinity)

1 – 50 cm

(0.4 in. – 1.6 ft.)

1.5 – 20 m

(4.9 – 66 ft.)

Maximum Telephoto

(

i

)

40 cm – infinity

(1.3 ft. – infinity)

40 cm – infinity

(1.3 ft. – infinity)

40 cm – infinity

(1.3 ft. – infinity)

1.5 – 20 m

(4.9 – 66 ft.)

Continuous Shooting Speed

Continuous Shooting Mode

W

Speed

Approx. 12.2 shots/sec.

Approx. 9.3 shots/sec.*

Approx. 5.7 shots/sec.

Approx. 5.9 shots/sec.

* From the sixth shot.

• Based on Canon testing standards, using a 8 GB UHS-I memory card. Note that the number of shots will vary depending on subjects, the brand of memory card, and other factors.

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

205

Shutter Speed

[ ] mode, automatically set range 1 – 1/4000 sec.

Available values in [ M ] or [ D ] mode

(sec.)*

250, 200, 160, 125, 100, 80, 60, 50, 40, 30, 25,

20, 15, 13, 10, 8, 6, 5, 4, 3.2, 2.5, 2, 1.6, 1.3, 1,

0.8, 0.6, 0.5, 0.4, 0.3, 1/4, 1/5, 1/6, 1/8, 1/10,

1/13, 1/15, 1/20, 1/25, 1/30, 1/40, 1/50, 1/60,

1/80, 1/100, 1/125, 1/160, 1/200, 1/250, 1/320,

1/400, 1/500, 1/640, 1/800, 1/1000, 1/1250,

1/1600, 1/2000, 1/2500, 1/3200, 1/4000

* In [ M ] mode, shutter speeds of 20 seconds or slower are not available.

Aperture

f/number

Available values in [ B ] mode* f/1.8 – f/8.0 (W), f/2.8 – f/8.0 (T) f/1.8, f/2.0, f/2.2, f/2.5, f/2.8, f/3.2, f/3.5, f/4.0, f/4.5, f/5.0, f/5.6, f/6.3, f/7.1, f/8.0

* Depending on the zoom position, some aperture values may not be available.

Battery Pack NB-10L

Type:

Nominal Voltage:

Nominal Capacity:

Charging Cycles:

Rechargeable lithium-ion battery

7.4 V DC

920 mAh

Approx. 300 times

Operating Temperatures: 0 – 40 °C (32 – 104 °F)

Dimensions:

Weight:

32.5 x 45.4 x 15.1 mm (1.28 x 1.79 x 0.59 in.)

Approx. 41 g (approx. 1.45 oz.)

Battery Charger CB-2LC/CB-2LCE

Rated Input:

Rated Output:

Charging Time:

100 – 240 V AC (50/60 Hz) 16 VA (100 V) – 22 VA (240 V),

0.18 A (100 V) – 0.12 A (240 V)

8.4 V DC, 0.7 A

Approx. 1 hour 50 min. (when using NB-10L)

Charge Indicator: Charging: orange / Fully charged: green (two indicators)

Operating Temperatures: 5 – 40 °C (41 – 104 °F)

Tele-Converter TC-DC58E (Sold Separately)

Zoom Factor:

Lens Construction:

1.4x

5 elements in 3 groups

Thread Diameter: 58 mm*

Max. Diameter x Length: ɸ69.0 x 36.5 mm (ɸ2.72 x 1.44 in.)

Weight: Approx. 165 g (approx. 5.8 oz.)

* Requires Conversion Lens Adapter LA-DC58L.

Conversion Lens Adapter LA-DC58L (Sold Separately)

Camera Mount:

Thread Diameter:

Bayonet

58 mm

Max. Diameter x Length: ɸ63.8 x 54.8 mm (ɸ2.51 x 2.16 in.)

Weight: Approx. 36 g (approx. 1.3 oz.)

Filter Adapter FA-DC58D (Sold Separately)

Max. Diameter x Length: ɸ66.0 x 46.7 mm (ɸ2.60 x 1.84 in.)

Weight: Approx. 58 g (approx. 2.0 oz.)

Bracket BKT-DC1 (Sold Separately)

Dimensions (Max.): 220.0 x 32.0 x 19.0 mm (8.66 x 1.26 x 0.75 in.)

Weight: Approx. 90 g (approx. 3.2 oz.)

All data is based on tests by Canon.

Camera specifications or appearance are subject to change without notice.

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

206

Index

A

AC adapter kit ............................ 160, 165

Accessories ....................................... 160

AEB shooting ....................................... 72

AE lock ................................................ 69

AF frames ............................................ 81

AF lock................................................. 85

Aspect ratio.......................................... 44

AUTO mode

(shooting mode)....................... 16, 23, 29

Av (shooting mode) ............................. 93

B

Background defocus

(shooting mode)................................... 58

Batteries

Date/time (date/time battery)

Battery charger .............................. 2, 160

Battery pack

Charging ........................................ 12

Eco mode .................................... 152

Level ............................................ 191

Power saving ................................. 21

Black and white images ....................... 75

Blink detection ..................................... 48

C

C1/C2 (shooting mode) ....................... 99

Camera

Reset all ...................................... 157

Camera access point mode ............... 139

Camera shake ..................................... 89

CameraWindow (computer)............... 131

CameraWindow (smartphone)........... 130

CANON iMAGE

GATEWAY ......................... 125, 127, 128

Center (AF frame mode)...................... 81

Clock.................................................... 27

Color (white balance)........................... 74

Compression ratio (image quality)

....... 89

Connecting via an access point ......... 134

Connecting without an access point .. 139

Continuous shooting ............................ 76

Creative filters (shooting mode)

........... 54

Cropping .....................................119, 177

Custom white balance ......................... 74

D

Date/time

Adding date stamps ...................... 38

Changing ....................................... 15

Date/time battery ........................... 15

Settings ......................................... 14

World clock .................................. 151

DC coupler......................................... 165

Defaults

Reset all

Digital tele-converter............................ 80

Digital zoom ......................................... 35

Display language ................................. 16

DPOF ................................................. 180

Drive mode .......................................... 76

Dynamic Range Correction ................. 73

E

Eco mode .......................................... 152

Editing

Cropping .......................................119

i-Contrast ..................................... 120

My Colors .................................... 120

Red-eye correction ...................... 121

Resizing images ...........................118

Editing or erasing connection

information ......................................... 147

Electronic level .................................... 47

Erasing ...............................................114

Error messages ................................. 188

Exposure

AE lock .......................................... 69

Compensation ............................... 68

FE lock .......................................... 87

F

Face AiAF (AF frame mode) ................ 82

Face ID ................................................ 39

Face select .......................................... 84

Face self-timer (shooting mode) .......... 61

Favorites .............................................117

FE lock................................................. 87

File numbering ................................... 154

Fireworks (shooting mode) .................. 53

Fish-eye effect (shooting mode) .......... 56

Flash

Deactivating flash

.......................... 86

Flash exposure compensation ...... 86

On ................................................. 85

Slow synchro ................................. 85

FlexiZone (AF frame mode)................. 81

Focus bracketing ................................. 80

Focus check ...................................... 109

Focusing

AF frames ...................................... 81

AF lock .......................................... 85

AF-point zoom ............................... 47

Face select .................................... 84

MF peaking ................................... 79

Servo AF ....................................... 83

Focusing range

Macro ............................................ 78

Quick ............................................. 53

Underwater macro ......................... 53

Focus lock ........................................... 81

Front dial...................................... 96, 107

FUNC. menu

Basic operations ............................ 24

Table ............................................ 195

FUNC. menu layout ............................. 98

G

GPS information display .................... 103

H

Handheld nightscene

(shooting mode)................................... 52

HDMI cable ........................................ 162

High dynamic range

(shooting mode)................................... 55

Household power............................... 165

Hybrid Auto (shooting mode) ............... 31

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

207

I

i-Contrast ..................................... 72, 120

Image quality → Compression ratio

(image quality)

Images

Display period ............................... 49

Erasing .........................................114

Playback

Viewing

Protecting .....................................111

Indicator ............................................... 27

ISO speed............................................ 70

L

Lamp.............................................. 48, 49

M

Macro (focusing range)........................ 78

Magnified display

............................... 109

Manual focus ....................................... 78

Memory cards ........................................ 2

Recording time ............................ 205

Menu

Basic operations ............................ 25

Table ............................................ 193

Mercury lamp correction ...................... 46

Metering method.................................. 69

Miniature effect (shooting mode) ......... 57

Monochrome (shooting mode)............. 59

Movies

Editing ......................................... 122

Image quality

(resolution/frame rate) ............. 46, 66

Recording time ............................ 205

M (shooting mode)............................... 93

Multi-area White Balance .................... 46

My Colors .................................... 75, 120

N

ND filter

................................................ 73

Neck strap

Strap

Nostalgic (shooting mode) ................... 56

P

Package contents .................................. 2

Photobook set-up .............................. 182

PictBridge .................................. 162, 176

Playback

Viewing

Portrait (shooting mode) ...................... 52

Poster effect (shooting mode) ............. 55

Power ................................................ 160

AC adapter kit

Battery charger

Battery pack

Power saving ....................................... 21

Printing .............................................. 176

Program AE ......................................... 68

Protecting ...........................................111

P (shooting mode) ............................... 68

Q

Quick (focusing range) ........................ 53

R

RAW .................................................... 88

Red-eye correction ...................... 45, 121

Reset all............................................. 157

Resizing images .................................118

Resolution (image size) ....................... 45

Rotating ..............................................116

S

Saving images to a computer ............ 144

Screen

Display language ........................... 16

Icons .................................... 191, 192

Menu

FUNC. menu, Menu

Searching .......................................... 106

Self-timer ............................................. 36

2-second self-timer ........................ 37

Customizing the self-timer ............. 37

Face self-timer (shooting mode) ... 61

Wink self-timer (shooting mode) ... 60

Sending images ................................. 142

Sending images to a computer .......... 127

Sending images to another camera... 126

Sending images to a printer............... 127

Sending images to a smartphone ...... 126

Sending images to Web services ...... 126

Sepia tone images ............................... 75

Servo AF .............................................. 83

Shadow correct.................................... 73

Shooting

Shooting date/time

Date/time

Shooting information ............. 95, 191

Slideshow ...........................................110

Smart Shuffle

......................................110

Smart Shutter (shooting mode) ........... 60

Smile (shooting mode)......................... 60

Snow (shooting mode)......................... 52

Soft focus (shooting mode).................. 59

Software

Installation ................................... 131

Saving images to a computer ...... 174

Sounds .............................................. 150

Star (shooting mode) ........................... 62

Star nightscape (shooting mode) .. 62

Star time-lapse movie (shooting

mode) ............................................ 63

Star trails (shooting mode) ............ 62

Stereo AV cable ................................. 165

Strap ................................................ 2, 12

Super slow motion movie

(movie mode)....................................... 66

Super vivid (shooting mode) ................ 54

T

Terminal ............................. 163, 165, 176

Toy camera effect (shooting mode) ..... 58

Tracking AF ................................... 38, 82

Traveling with the camera ................. 151

Troubleshooting ................................. 185

TV display .......................................... 163

Tv (shooting mode).............................. 92

U

Underwater macro (focusing range) .... 53

Underwater (shooting mode) ............... 52

V

Viewfinder

............................................ 22

Viewing ................................................ 18

Image search .............................. 106

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

208

Index display ............................... 105

Magnified display

........................ 109

Single-image display ..................... 18

Slideshow .....................................110

Smart Shuffle

...............................110

TV display ................................... 163

W

White balance (color)........................... 74

Wi-Fi

Connecting and sending

images ......................................... 126

Wi-Fi functions ................................... 124

Wi-Fi menu ........................................ 133

Wink self-timer (shooting mode) .......... 60

World clock ........................................ 151

Z

Zoom ....................................... 17, 29, 35

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

209

Wi-Fi (Wireless LAN) Precautions

The camera’s model number is PC2035/

PC2059/PC2010. To identify your model, check the label on the bottom of the camera for a number beginning with

PC

.

The built-in WLAN module model is written below.

Country/Region of Purchase

U.S.A., Canada, Taiwan

Other

WM222

WM218

WLAN Module Model

Doing any of the following may incur legal penalties:

Altering or modifying the product

Removing the certification labels from the product

According to foreign exchange and foreign trade law regulations, export permission (or service transaction permission) from the Japanese government is necessary to export strategic resources or services

(including this product) outside Japan.

Because this product includes American encryption software, it falls under U.S. Export Administration Regulations, and cannot be exported to or brought into a country under U.S. trade embargo.

Be sure to make notes of the wireless LAN settings you use.

The wireless LAN settings saved to this product may change or be erased due to incorrect operation of the product, the effects of radio waves or static electricity, or accident or malfunction. Be sure to make notes of wireless LAN settings as a precaution. Please note that Canon accepts no responsibility for direct or indirect damages or loss of earnings resulting from a degradation or disappearance of content.

When transferring this product to another person, disposing of it, or sending it for repair, be sure to note the wireless LAN settings and reset the product to its default settings (erase settings) if necessary.

Canon will not make compensation for damages resulting from loss or theft of the product.

Canon accepts no responsibility for damages or loss resulting from unauthorized access or use of target devices registered on this product due to loss or theft of the product.

Be sure to use the product as directed in this guide.

Be sure to use the wireless LAN function of this product within the guidelines noted in this guide. Canon accepts no responsibility for damages or loss if the function and product are used in ways other than as described in this guide.

Do not use the wireless LAN function of this product near medical equipment or other electronic equipment.

Use of the wireless LAN function near medical equipment or other electronic equipment may affect operation of those devices.

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

210

Radio Wave Interference Precautions

This product may receive interference from other devices that emit radio waves. To avoid interference, be sure to use this product as far away as possible from such devices, or avoid using the devices at the same time as this product.

Security Precautions

Because Wi-Fi uses radio waves to transmit signals, security precautions more stringent than when using a LAN cable are required.

Keep the following points in mind when using Wi-Fi.

Only use networks you are authorized to use.

This product searches for Wi-Fi networks in the vicinity and displays the results on the screen. Networks you are not authorized to use (unknown networks) may also be displayed. However, attempting to connect to or using such networks could be regarded as unauthorized access. Be sure to use only networks you are authorized to use, and do not attempt to connect to other unknown networks.

If security settings have not been properly set, the following problems may occur.

Transmission monitoring

Third parties with malicious intent may monitor Wi-Fi transmissions and attempt to acquire the data you are sending.

Unauthorized network access

Third parties with malicious intent may gain unauthorized access to the network you are using to steal, modify, or destroy information.

Additionally, you could fall victim to other types of unauthorized access such as impersonation (where someone assumes an identity to gain access to unauthorized information) or springboard attacks (where someone gains unauthorized access to your network as a springboard to cover their tracks when infiltrating other systems).

To prevent these types of problems from occurring, be sure to thoroughly secure your Wi-Fi network.

Only use this camera’s Wi-Fi function with a proper understanding of

Wi-Fi security, and balance risk and convenience when adjusting security settings.

The camera can print to PictBridge-compatible printers via Wi-Fi. PictBridge technical standards make it easy to connect digital cameras, printers, and other devices directly. Additionally, a new standard called DPS over IP enables PictBridge connections in network environments, and the camera is also compatible with this standard.

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

211

Battery Charger CB-2LC FCC/IC Notice

Model: PC2035 (including WLAN Module Model WM222, FCC ID: AZD222)

Battery Charger CB-2LCE

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

212

FCC Notice

(Digital Camera, Model PC2035 systems)

Trademarks and Licensing

Microsoft and Windows are trademarks or registered trademarks of

Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.

Macintosh and Mac OS are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the

U.S. and other countries.

App Store, iPhone, and iPad are trademarks of Apple Inc.

The SDXC logo is a trademark of SD-3C, LLC.

HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC.

Wi-Fi

®

, Wi-Fi Alliance

®

, WPA™, WPA2™ and Wi-Fi Protected Setup™ are trademarks or registered trademarks of the Wi-Fi Alliance.

All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.

This device incorporates exFAT technology licensed from Microsoft.

This product is licensed under AT&T patents for the MPEG-4 standard and may be used for encoding MPEG-4 compliant video and/or decoding

MPEG-4 compliant video that was encoded only (1) for a personal and non-commercial purpose or (2) by a video provider licensed under the

AT&T patents to provide MPEG-4 compliant video. No license is granted or implied for any other use for MPEG-4 standard.

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

213

Disclaimer

Reprinting, transmitting, or storing in a retrieval system any part of this guide without the permission of Canon is prohibited.

Canon reserves the right to change the contents of this guide at any time without prior notice.

Illustrations and screenshots in this guide may differ slightly from the actual equipment.

The above items notwithstanding, Canon accepts no liability for damages due to mistaken operation of the products.

Cover

Before Use

Common Camera

Operations

Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Camera Basics

Auto Mode /

Hybrid Auto Mode

Other Shooting

Modes

P Mode

Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode

Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu

Accessories

Appendix

Index

214

Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement